Samsung Electronics Co 708SC PCS GSM/ EDGE Phone with Bluetooth User Manual
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd PCS GSM/ EDGE Phone with Bluetooth Users Manual
Users Manual
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the SoftBank 708SC.
●Read this guide thoroughly before
using 708SC to ensure proper usage.
●After reading this guide, keep it for
later reference.
●Should you lose or damage this guide,
contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
●Accessible services may be limited by
contract conditions or service area.
708SC is compatible with both 3G and
GSM network technologies.
Note
･Unauthorized copying of any part of this
guide is prohibited.
･Contents are subject to change without
prior notice.
･Not all functions and services described in
this user guide are available in Japan.
･Steps have been taken to ensure the
accuracy of descriptions in this guide. If
you find inaccurate or missing
information, contact Customer Service
( P.25-25).
･If there are any missing/misplaced pages
in this manual, SoftBank will replace it.
i
Accessories
Make sure the following accessories are included in the package with handset. These accessories are also sold
separately.
For details on accessories or optional items, contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
Battery AC Charger
Utility Software
(CD-ROM)
Stereo Earphone
Microphone
USB Cable
Microphone Cable
ii
Contents
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
About This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
General Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviii
SAR Certification Information. . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv
1 Getting Started
USIM Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
General Information & Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Inserting & Removing USIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
USIM PINs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Handset Parts & Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Display Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Sub Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Battery & Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Before Using Battery or Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Inserting & Removing Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
AC Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
In-Car Charger (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Time & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Time & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Time Zone Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Changing Home Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
708SC Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Switch Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Security Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Phone Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Center Access Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Network Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
2 Basic Handset Operations
Initiating a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Receiving a Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Reject Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Answer Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Activating & Canceling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Ringing Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
iii
Sound Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Checking Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engaged Call Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Earpiece Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Speaker Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Voice Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engaged Call Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Call Log Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Viewing Call Log Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Calling from Call Log Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Deleting Call Log Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Call Log Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Call Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Data Counter, Call Costs, & Call Times . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Edit Cost Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Display Call Cost during a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
International Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Changing Network Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Calling from Outside Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
3 Manner Profile
Minding Mobile Manners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Manner Related Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Manner Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Changing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Offline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
4 Entering Text
Text Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Text Entry Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Changing Text Entry Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Key Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Entering Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Hiragana/Kanji . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Katakana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Alphanumerics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Symbols, Pictograms, & Emoticons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Line Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Quoting Saved Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Hangul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Copy/Cut, Paste, & Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Prediction On/Off (Japanese Only). . . . . . . . . 4-14
iv
Learning On/Off (Japanese Only) . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
User Dictionary (Japanese Only) . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Saving to User Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SMS Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
5 Phonebook
Saving to Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Phonebook Entry Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Adding Entry Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Saving from Call Log Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Category Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
New Category (USIM Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Edit Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Add Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Using Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Calling from Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Phonebook Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Editing Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Default Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Copy to USIM/Copy to Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Deleting Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
My Phonebook Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
6 Video Call
Before Using Video Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Initiating a Video Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Receiving a Video Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Engaged Video Call Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Engaged Video Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Video Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Sending Your Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Selecting a Substitute Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Retry Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Voice Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
7 Mobile Camera
Before Using Mobile Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Mobile Camera Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
708SC Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Using Display as Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Capturing a Still Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Camera Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Capturing Still Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Capturing Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Video Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
v
Capturing Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Mobile Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Viewing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Viewing Still Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Viewing Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Editing Still Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Editing Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Create Flash®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Attaching Images to a Message . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
8 Display Settings
Standby Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Operator Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Menu Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
List Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Zoom List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Backlight Brightness & Duration. . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Adjusting Display Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Backlight Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Sub LCD Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Dialing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Greeting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
9 Sound Settings
Changing Profile Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
10 Media Player
Before Using Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Playing Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Playing Melodies Using a Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Changing Music Player Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Repeat Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Tone Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Audio Skin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Visualization Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Playing Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Player Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Repeat Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Tone Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
vi
11 Managing Files(Data Fold-
er)
Data Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Default Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Saved Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Opening Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Using File Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Viewing Graphics/Animation with the SVG-T/Flash®
Viewer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Sorting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Using Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Setting Sound File as Ringtone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Setting Video File as Ringtone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Setting Flash® file as Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Saving a vFile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Data Folder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Managing Files/Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Create Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Changing a File Name/Folder Name . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Moving a File/Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Copying Files/Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Deleting a File/Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Deleting a Content Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19
12 External Connections
External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Bluetooth®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Before Using Bluetooth® Communications . . . . . . .12-2
Sending & Receiving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Connecting Handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9
Changing Bluetooth® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
USB Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Connecting to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
Connecting to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
13 Security
Change Phone Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Changing PIN/PIN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
PIN Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Resetting PIN Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
USIM Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Handset Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Phone Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Password Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Privacy Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
vii
Activate Secret Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Mobile Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Rejecting Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
Reject Withheld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Reject Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Black List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Restoring Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Clear Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Master Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
14 Tools
Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Wake-up Alarm/Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Auto Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Displaying Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Saving New Entries to Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Viewing Saved Calendar Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Editing Calendar Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Deleting Calendar Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Calendar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Voice Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Voice Recorder Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Recording Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Playing Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Changing Voice Recorder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Viewing World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
Selecting Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
Using Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Converting Currencies or Units . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Converting Currencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20
Converting Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21
Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Interpreter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
15 Advanced Functions
Calling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Auto Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
International Dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
Earphone call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
Handling Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Anykey Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Acoustic Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5
Active Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Side Key Silence/Reject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Side Key Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Simple Search Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
viii
Idle Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7
Memory Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
16 Optional Services
Optional Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-2
Call Forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-3
Activating Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Cancel All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Check Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-5
Activating Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Canceling Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Checking Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Listening to Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Incoming Call Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Call Waiting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-8
Activating or Canceling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Receiving a Second Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Conference Call* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-9
New Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Engaged Conference Call Operations . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Call Barring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-11
Restrict Outgoing/Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Cancel All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Changing Network Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-13
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Show My Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-13
Adding 186 or 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-14
17
Receiving & Sending Messag-
es
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Checking for New Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Retrieving Complete Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-4
Using Received Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-5
Creating Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-7
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-8
Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-11
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-11
Sending a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12
Slide Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12
Changing the Style of Message Field . . . . . . . . . . .17-13
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-14
Attaching/Inserting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15
Attaching/Inserting a File from Data Folder, etc. into
Message Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-15
Creating & Inserting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18
ix
Saving Created Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20
Save to Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Save as a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
18 Messaging Folders
Viewing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-2
Message Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Message Window Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Replying to a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-7
Forwarding a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-8
Sending from Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-8
Sending from Unsent Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .18-9
Deleting a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-9
Deleting Specified Message(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Designating & Deleting a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Deleting All Messages from a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Linked Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-11
Saving to Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Saving as a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Initiating a Call, Sending a Message, or Accessing the
Web
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Using an Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-13
Viewing an Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
Saving Attachments to Data Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
Managing Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
Create Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-15
Edit Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
Security ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-15
Moving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-16
Delete Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-16
From Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Saving to Phonebook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Sorting Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
Move to Phone/Move to USIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-18
Saving an S! Mail Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-19
Message List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-20
19 Server Mail
Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Acquire Mail List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-2
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-2
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-3
Remote Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
20 Other Message Settings
Customizing Handset Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
S! Mail Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
x
Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Receiving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Message Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Default Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
SMS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-5
3D Pictogram Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-5
Reply with text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-6
21 Mobile Internet
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-2
Getting Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-3
Yahoo! Keitai Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Enter URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Page Window Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-4
Using Linked Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
22 Mobile Internet Files
Using Image Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-2
Saving Images to Data Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Using Sound Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-4
Playing Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Saving Sound Files to Data Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Using Video Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-6
Playing a Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-6
Saving Videos to Data Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-6
Streaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
Saving Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8
Saving a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-8
Opening a Saved Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-8
Change Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-8
Deleting a Saved Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-9
Saving Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
Saving an Address as a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-9
Opening a Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-10
Editing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-10
Deleting a Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-11
History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-12
Search Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-13
Copy Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-13
Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-13
Page Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Send URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-14
Server Certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-14
Returning to Default Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-15
Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-15
Information Window Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-15
xi
23 Other Web Settings
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-2
Cookie Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Activating/Deactivating Java Script. . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
Text Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
Manufacture Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
Browser Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Refresh Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-4
Empty Cache/Empty Cookies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
24 S! Appli
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-2
S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Network S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Downloading S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-2
Starting S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-3
Exit, Pause, & Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-3
Exiting or Pausing S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
Restarting a Paused S! Appli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
Managing S! Appli. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-4
Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-4
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-5
mPet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5
Selecting Pet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-5
mPet Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-7
Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-9
Comic Surfing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
Browsing Electronic Comic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-11
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12
S! Appli Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-13
Application Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-13
Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-14
S! Appli Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-14
Reset S! Appli Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-14
25 Appendix
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
Symbols & Pictograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-12
Pictograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-14
Memory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
xii
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-15
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-17
Warranty & After Sales Service. . . . . . . . . . .25-24
Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-25
xiii
About This Guide
In this guide, 708SC refers to SoftBank 708SC.
Instructions are described using mainly default
settings. When settings are changed, screen shots or
handset responses may differ from those depicted in
this guide.
Screen Shots and 708SC Illustrations
Screen shots appearing in this guide are for reference
only and may differ from actual displays. Product
illustrations may vary from actual products.
Confirmations/Warning Messages
Messages not described in this guide may appear;
read all confirmations and warning messages
carefully.
Symbols
In this guide, symbols represent 708SC keys; see
"Handset Parts & Functions" ( P.1-6). Softkey and
Multi Selector operations are indicated as shown
below.
Operation options appear at the bottom of Display.
Press the corresponding Softkey to execute assigned
functions.
Softkey Operations
Softkeys
保存 選択 再生
Press c
to Select
Press o
to Play
Press w
to Save
Press
Assigned Function
Softkey
xiv
Use Multi Selector to select menu items, move
cursor, and scroll, etc. In this guide, Multi Selector
operations are indicated as shown below.
Basic Multi Selector Operations
j : Press u or d
s : Press l or r
a : Press u,d,l, or r
Highlighting
In this guide, "to highlight" means to move cursor to
an item.
Menu Operations
Menu/Options operations are simplified with arrows.
Main Menu
Options
Multi Selector Operations
u
lr
dHighlight an item and press c (Select)
For details, see "708SC Menus" ( P.1-20).
APress and select Settings →
Display settings →Wallpaper
Press o (Options) to open Options
Highlight an item and press c (Select)
ASelect Options →Send →Via
bluetooth
xv
Safety Precautions
• Read these safety precautions before using handset.
• Observe all precautions to avoid injury to yourself and others, or damage to
property.
• SoftBank is not liable for any damages resulting from use of this product.
xvi
Before Using Handset
●
Symbols
Make sure you thoroughly understand these symbols before reading on. Symbols and their meanings are
described below:
Great risk of death or serious injury from improper use
Risk of death or serious injury from improper use
Risk of injury or damage to property from improper use
Prohibited Actions
Compulsory Actions
Attention Required
Danger
Warning
Caution
xvii
Handset, Battery, & Charger
Use only specified battery and
Charger ( P.i).
Using non-specified equipment may cause
malfunctions, electric shock or fire due to battery
leakage, overheating, or bursting.
Do not short-circuit Charger Port.
Keep metal objects away from the Charger
Port. Keep handset away from jewelry. Battery may
leak, overheat, burst, or ignite causing injury. Use a
case to carry handset.
Battery
If battery fluid gets into your eyes,
do not rub them. Rinse with clean
water and consult a doctor
immediately.
Eyes may be severely damaged.
Prevent injury from battery
leakage, breakage, or fire.
Do not:
• Heat or dispose of battery in a fire.
• Disassemble, modify, or break battery.
• Damage or solder on to battery.
• Use a damaged or deformed battery.
• Use a non-specified charger.
• Force battery into handset.
Danger
xviii
• Charge or place battery near fire, heat sources or
expose it to extreme heat ( P.i).
• Use battery for other equipments.
Handset, Battery, & Charger
Do not insert foreign objects into
handset.
Do not place metal or flammable objects in handset
or Charger. This may cause fire or electric shock.
Keep handset out of the reach of children.
Keep handset out of rain or
extreme humidity.
Fire or electric shock may occur.
Keep handset away from liquid-
filled containers.
Keep handset and Charger away from chemicals/
liquids. Fire or electric shock may result.
Avoid sources of fire.
To prevent fire or explosion, do not use
handset in the presence of gas or fine particles (Coal,
dust, metal, etc.).
Keep handset and Charger away
from microwave ovens.
Battery or handset may leak, burst, overheat, or
ignite.
Warning
xix
Do not disassemble or modify
handset.
• Do not open the housing of handset or Charger; it
may cause electric shock or injury. Contact the
SoftBank Customer Center, Customer Assistance
for repairs.
• Do not modify handset or Charger. Fire or electric
shock may result.
If water or foreign matter gets
inside handset:
Discontinue handset use to prevent fire or electric
shock. Turn handset power off, remove battery,
unplug Charger and contact the SoftBank Customer
Center, Customer Assistance.
Do not subject handset to shocks.
Subjecting handset or Charger to shocks may
cause malfunction or injury. Should handset break,
remove battery and contact the SoftBank Customer
Center, Customer Assistance. Discontinue handset
use. Fire or electric shock may occur.
If an abnormality occurs:
Should there be any unusual sound, smoke,
or odor, discontinue handset use to avoid fire or
electric shock. Turn handset power off, remove
battery, unplug the Charger, and contact the
SoftBank Customer Center, Customer Assistance.
xx
Handset
Preventing accidents
• For safety, never use handset while driving.
Pull over beforehand. Mobile phone use while
driving is prohibited by the revised Road Traffic
Law (Effective 1 November 2004).
• Do not use headphones while driving or riding a
bicycle. Accidents may result.
• Do not turn the volume up so high that ambient
sounds cannot be heard, especially when walking
in or around traffic to avoid accidents.
Do not swing handset by the
handstrap.
Injury or breakage may result.
Turn handset power off before
boarding aircraft.
Using wireless devices aboard aircraft may cause
electronic malfunctions or endanger aircraft
operation.
Adjust vibration and Ringtone
settings:
Select settings carefully if you have a heart condition
or wear a pacemaker/defibrillator.
During thunderstorms, turn power
off; find cover.
There is a risk of a lightning strike or electric shock.
Do not use the phone with wet
hands.
Doing so may lead to electric shock or damage to
708SC.
xxi
Charger
Use only the specified voltage.
• Non-specified voltages may cause fire or
electric shock.
• AC Charger: AC 100V-240V Input
SoftBank is not liable for problems caused by
charging handset abroad.
• In-Car Charger: DC 100V-240V Input
Do not use commercially available
transformers.
Use of the AC Charger with commercially available
transformers may cause fire, electric shock or
damage.
Do not use In-Car Charger inside
vehicles with a positive earth.
Fire may result. Use In-Car Charger only inside
vehicles with a negative earth.
Do not touch the cooling blades
with wet hands.
Electric shock may occur.
Do not use multiple cords in one
outlet.
Excess heat or fire may occurs.
Do not bend, twist, pull, or set
objects on the cord. Do not put
heavy objects on the cords or heat
or pull the cords.
Fire or electric shock may result.
Do not short-circuit Charger Port.
Keep the metal away from Port. Overheating,
fire, or electric shock may result.
xxii
Do not use AC/In-Car Charger if
the cord is damaged.
Fire or electric shock may be caused. Contact the
SoftBank Customer Assistance to replace the cord.
Be sure to secure In-Car Charger.
Avoid injury or accidents.
During thunderstorms:
Unplug the Charger to avoid damage, fire, or
electric shock.
Keep the Charger out of the reach
of children.
Electric shock or injury may occur.
Battery
If battery does not charge properly,
stop charging.
Battery may overheat, burst or ignite.
If there is leakage or abnormal
odor, avoid fire sources.
It may catch fire or burst.
If there is abnormal odor, excessive
heat, discoloration, or distortion,
remove battery from handset.
It may leak, overheat, or explode.
xxiii
Handset Use & Electronic Medical
Equipment
This section is based on "Guidelines on the Use of
Radio Communications Equipment such as Cellular
Telephones and Safeguards for Electronic Medical
Equipment" (Electromagnetic Compatibility
Conference, April 1997) and "Report of
Investigation of the Effects of Radio Waves on
Medical Equipment, etc." (Association of Radio
Industries and Businesses, March 2001).
People with implanted pacemakers/
defibrillators should keep handset
more than 22 cm away.
Implanted pacemakers/defibrillators may
malfunction due to radio waves.
Turn handset power off in crowded
places such as trains. People with
implanted pacemakers/
defibrillators may be near.
Implanted pacemakers/defibrillators may
malfunction due to radio waves.
Observe these rules inside medical
facilities:
• Do not take handset into operating rooms or
Intensive or Coronary Care Units.
• Keep handset off in hospitals.
• Keep handset off in hospital lobbies. Electronic
equipment may be near.
• Obey rules regarding mobile phone use in medical
facilities.
Consult the manufacturer of other
electronic medical equipment
about radio wave effects.
xxiv
Handset, Battery, & Charger
Handset Care
• Place 708SC on stable surfaces to avoid
malfunction or injury.
• Keep 708SC away from oily smoke or steam. Fire
or accidents may result.
• Cold air from air conditioners may condense,
resulting in leakage, or burnout.
• Keep 708SC away from direct sunlight (Inside
vehicles, etc.) or heat sources. Distortion,
discoloration, or fire may occur. Battery shape may
be affected.
• Keep 708SC out of extremely cold places to avoid
malfunction or accidents.
• Keep 708SC away from fire sources to avoid
malfunction or accidents.
Usage Environment
• Excessive dust may prevent heat release and cause
burnout or fire.
• Avoid using 708SC on the beach. Sand may cause
malfunction or accidents.
• Keep 708SC away from credit cards, phone cards,
etc. to avoid data loss.
Handset
Avoid leaving 708SC in extreme
heat (Inside vehicles, etc.).
Handset may heat up and lead to burns.
Volume settings
Keep handset volume moderate.
Excessive volume may cause damage to your
hearing.
Caution
xxv
Headphones
• Do not unplug by pulling the cord; may
damage the cord.
• Keep the plug clean to avoid noise or malfunction.
Inside vehicles:
Handset use may cause other electronic
equipment to malfunction.
Should skin irritation occur,
discontinue handset use and
consult a doctor.
Skin irritation, rashes, or itchiness may result
depending on your physical condition.
Charger
Charger & In-Car Charger
• Grasp the plug (not the cord) to disconnect
Charger. Otherwise, fire or electric shock
may result.
• Keep the cord away from heaters. Exposed wire
may cause fire or electric shock.
• Stop use if the plug is hot or improperly
connected. Fire or electric shock may
result.
• Keep In-Car Charger socket clean. If might
overheat and cause injury.
Parts Materials &
Finishing
Housing PC/UV coating
Keypad Mixture material
Charger & External Device Port
Cover
Mixture material/
UV coating
Battery Cover PC/UV coating
Side keys Mixture material/
UV coating
Rotate Camera PC/UV coating
Camera Ornament PC/UV coating
Hinge Cap Zinc Alloy/
Nickel coating
Parts Materials &
Finishing
xxvi
Use only the specified fuse
A 1A fuse is specified for In-Car Charger. An
improper fuse may cause damage or fire.
Always charge 708SC in a well-
ventilated area.
Avoid covering/wrapping Charger; may cause
damage or fire.
Do not use In-Car Charger when
engine is off.
Start engine before use; may weaken car battery.
Disconnect AC/In-Car Charger
during long periods of disuse.
Be sure to unplug AC/In-Car Charger after use.
Handset Maintenance
When cleaning, disconnect AC/In-Car Charger to
prevent shock or injury.
xxvii
Installing In-Car Charger
Properly position the cable for safe driving to
avoid injury or accidents.
Battery
Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
They may sustain injuries. And when using, do not
let them remove battery from handset.
Do not leave battery in direct
sunlight or inside vehicles.
Overheating or fire may occur and performance may
be reduced.
Do not expose battery to liquids.
Performance may deteriorate.
If battery fluid makes contact with
skin or clothes:
Rinse with clean water immediately.
Do not dispose of exhausted
batteries with ordinary refuse.
Tape over battery terminals before disposal, or bring
them to a SoftBank shop. Follow local regulations
regarding battery disposal.
Do not throw or abuse battery.
Battery may overheat, burst, or ignite.
Charge battery within a range of
5°C - 40°C.
Battery may leak/overheat and performance may
deteriorate.
xxviii
If a child is using handset, explain
all these instructions and supervise
handset’s usage.
If there is any abnormal odor or
excessive heat, stop using battery
and call the SoftBank Customer Center,
Customer Assistance.
Do not leave battery uncharged.
Charge at least once every six
months.
xxix
General Notes
General Use
• SoftBank is not liable for any damages
resulting from accidental loss/alteration of
any data on handset. Please keep separate
records of Phonebook entries, etc.
• Handset transmissions may be disrupted
inside buildings, tunnels, or underground,
or when moving into/out of such places.
• Use handset without disturbing others.
• Handsets are radios as stipulated by the
Radio Law. Under the Radio Law,
handsets must be submitted for inspection
upon request.
• Handset use near landlines, TVs or radios
may cause interference.
• Beware of eavesdropping.
Because this service is completely digital,
the possibility of signal interception is
greatly reduced. However, some
transmissions may be overheard.
Eavesdropping
Deliberate/accidental interception of
communications constitutes
eavesdropping.
Inside Vehicles
• Never use handset while driving.
• Do not park illegally to use handset.
• Handset use may affect a vehicle's
electronic equipment.
Aboard Aircraft
Never use handset aboard aircraft (Keep the power
off).
Handset use may impair aircraft operation.
xxx
Function Restrictions
• After changing phone models or canceling
708SC contract, following functions
become unavailable:
f Camera
f Media Player
f S! Appli
• If 708SC is left unused, above functions
may become unavailable.
Handset Care
• If handset is left with no battery or an
exhausted one, data may be altered/lost.
SoftBank is not liable for any resulting
damages.
• Use handset between 5°C - 40°C.
• Avoid extreme temperatures/direct
sunlight.
• Exposing the lens to direct sunlight may
damage the color filter and affect image
color.
• Do not drop or subject handset to shocks.
• Clean handset with a dry, soft cloth. Using
alcohol, thinner, etc. may damage it.
• Do not expose handset to rain, snow, or
high humidity.
• Never disassemble or modify handset.
• Avoid scratching Display.
• When closing handset, keep straps, etc.
outside to avoid damaging Display.
• When using headphones, moderate the
volume to avoid sound bleed.
• Handset is not water-proof. Avoid
exposure to liquids and high humidity.
fKeep handset away from precipitation.
fCold air from air conditioning, etc. may
condense causing corrosion.
xxxi
fAvoid placing handset in damp places
(Restrooms, bath/shower rooms, etc.).
fOn the beach, keep handset away from
water and direct sunlight.
fPerspiration may get inside handset
causing malfunction.
• Heavy objects or excessive pressure
should be avoided. This may cause
malfunction or injury.
fDo not sit down with handset in a back
pocket.
fDo not place heavy objects on handset
in a bag.
• Insert only specified devices into
Headphone Port. Malfunction or damage
may result.
• Always turn power off before removing
battery. If battery is removed while saving
data or sending mail, data may be lost,
changed or destroyed.
Copyrights
Copyright laws protect sounds, images, computer
programs, databases, other materials for copyright
holders. Duplicated material is limited to private use
only.
Use of materials beyond this limit or without
permission of copyright holders may constitute
copyright infringement, and be subject to criminal
punishment. Comply with copyright laws when using
images captured with handset camera.
The software contained in 708SC is copyrighted
material; copyright, moral right, and other related
rights are protected by copyright laws. Do not copy,
modify, alter, disassemble, decompile, or reverse-
engineer the software, and do not separate it from
hardware in whole or part.
xxxii
Trademarks
• Licensed by QUALCOMM
Incorporated under one or more of the
following United States Patents and/or
their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109
5,504,773 5,101,501 5,506,865
5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054
5,535,239 5,267,261 5,544,196
5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338
5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420
5,416,797 5,659,569 5,710,784
5,778,338
• S! Appli and Mail Art are trademarks
or registered trademarks of
SOFTBANK MOBILE Corp.
• "SOFTBANK," SOFTBANK's
equivalent in Japanese, and the
SOFTBANK logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of SOFTBANK
CORP. in Japan and in other countries.
• Yahoo! and the "Yahoo!" or "Y!" logos
are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Yahoo! Inc.
• This product contains ACCESS Co.,
Ltd.’s NetFront Internet browser
software. NetFront is a trademark or
registered trademark of ACCESS Co.,
Ltd. in Japan and in other
countries.
• Part of the software in this product
incorporates a module developed by
the Independent JPEG Group.
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED
UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
xxxiii
THE PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD
("MPEG-4 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii)
DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY
MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED
OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT
RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL
USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
• Contains Macromedia® Flash® Flash
LiteTM technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
• Copyright© 1995-2005 Adobe Systems
Incorporated. All rights reserved.
• Macromedia, Flash, Macromedia
Flash, and Macromedia Flash Lite are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and other countries.
• JBlendTM is incorporated in this
product. JBlendTM is a JavaTM execution
environment developed by Aplix
Corporation for implementing
xxxiv
advanced performance and fast
operation on small-memory systems.
• Powered by JBlendTM
Technology.
JBlend and JBlend logos are
registered trademarks of Aplix
Corporation in Japan and other
countries.
• Powered by JBlendTM,©1997-2006
Aplix Corporation.
All rights reserved.
• JBlend and all JBlend-based
trademarks and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Aplix
Corporation in Japan and other
countries.
• Chaku-Uta® and Chaku-Uta Full® are
registered trade marks of Sony Music
Entertainment Corp.
• Java and all Java-based
trademarks and logos are
trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
in the United States and other
countries.
xxxv
• Bluetooth is a trademark of
the
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Samsung
Electronics is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
Bluetooth
®
In the frequency band of the Bluetooth®
functions of 708SC, Industrial, scientific
or medical equipments such as
microwave ovens or in-house radio
stations such as the ones used in
production lines or by amateur radio
stations (Referred to as "other radio
stations" hereafter) are used. In order to
prevent radio interference with other
radio equipments, follow the points
listed below in using handset.
1.Before using Bluetooth® functions,
confirm there are no "other radio
stations" operating near you.
xxxvi
2.In case there is a radio interference
with "other radio stations," move to
some other place or stop the
Bluetooth® functions (Stop emitting
the radio waves) immediately.
3.If you have any questions or problems
with Bluetooth® emissions, contact
SoftBank as listed below:
Contact: SoftBank Customer Center
From a SoftBank handset, dial 157 (toll free) for
General Information. See "Customer Service"
( P.25-25) for landline numbers by service area.
708SC transmits on the 2.4 GHz band, employing
frequency-hopping spread spectrum (FHSS)
modulation, with resistance to radio frequency
interference between 1.5 - 5 meters, depending on
usage environment.
xxxvii
Health and Safety Information
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
Certification Information (SAR)
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and
receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to
exceed the exposure limits for radio frequency (RF)
energy set by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. government. These
FCC exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations, the
National Counsel on Radiation Protection and
Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical
and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the
recommendations were developed by scientific and
engineering experts drawn from industry,
government, and academia after extensive reviews of
the scientific literature related to the biological
effects of RF energy.The exposure limit set by the
FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of
measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of
absorption of RF energy by the human body
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The
FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a
safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial
margin of safety to give additional protection to the
public and to account for any variations in
measurements.SAR tests are conducted using
standard operating positions accepted by the FCC
with the phone transmitting at its highest certified
power level in all tested frequency bands. Although
the SAR is determined at the highest certified power
xxxviii
level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
operating can be well below the maximum value.
This is because the phone is designed to operate at
multiple power levels so as to use only the power
required to reach the network. In general, the closer
you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower
the power output.Before a new model phone is
available for sale to the public, it must be tested and
certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the
exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
model phone are performed in positions and
locations (e.g. at the ear and worn on the body) as
required by the FCC.
The highest SAR values for this model phone as
reported to the FCC are GSM1900 Mode(Part 24)
Head:1.06 W/Kg, Body-worn: 0.692 W/Kg. For
body worn operation, this model phone has been tested
and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines whenused
with a Samsung accessory designated for this product
or when used with an accessory that contains no metal
add that positions the handset a minimum of 1.5 cm
from the body. Non-compliance with the above
restrictions may result in violation of FCC RF exposure
guidelines. SAR information on this and other model
phones can be viewed on-line at www.fcc.gov/oet/
fccid. This site uses the phone FCC ID number,
A3L708SC. Sometimes it may be necessary to
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once
you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone,
follow the instructions on the website and it should
provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a
particular phone. Additional product specific SAR
information can also be obtained at www.fcc.gov/
cgb/sar.
Consumer Information on Wireless
Phones
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has
published a series of Questions and Answers for
consumers relating to radio frequency (RF) exposure
xxxix
from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes
the following information:
What kinds of phones are the subject of this
update?
The term wireless phone refers here to hand-held
wireless phones with built-in antennas, often called
°×cell,°± °×mobile,°± or °×PCS°± phones. These
types of wireless phones can expose the user to
measurable radio frequency energy (RF) because of
the short distance between the phone and the user's
head. These RF exposures are limited by Federal
Communications Commission safety guidelines that
were developed with the advice of FDA and other
federal health and safety agencies. When the phone is
located at greater distances from the user, the
exposure to RF is drastically lower because a
person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with
increasing distance from the source. The so-called
°×cordless phones,°± which have a base unit
connected to the telephone wiring in a house,
typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus
produce RF exposures well within the FCC's
compliance limits.
Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?
The available scientific evidence does not show that
any health problems are associated with using
wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that
wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones
emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the
microwave range while being used. They also emit
very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode.
Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that
does not produce heating effects causes no known
adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF
exposures have not found any biological effects.
Some studies have suggested that some biological
effects may occur, but such findings have not been
xl
confirmed by additional research. In some cases,
other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing
those studies, or in determining the reasons for
inconsistent results.
What is FDA's role concerning the safety of
wireless phones?
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of
radiation-emitting consumer products such as
wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does
with new drugs or medical devices. However, the
agency has authority to take action if wireless phones
are shown to emit radio frequency energy (RF) at a
level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case,
FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless
phones to notify users of the health hazard and to
repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard
no longer exists.Although the existing scientific data
do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has
urged the wireless phone industry to take a number
of steps, including the following:.
• Support needed research into possible biological
effects of RF of the type emitted by wireless
phones;.
• Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes
any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary
for device function; and.
• Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones
with the best possible information on possible
effects of wireless phone use on human health.
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the
federal agencies that have responsibility for different
aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at
the federal level. The following agencies belong to
this working group:.
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health.
• Environmental Protection Agency.
• Federal Communications Commission.
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
xli
• National Telecommunications and Information
Administration
The National Institutes of Health participates in some
interagency working group activities, as well.
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless
phones with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the
United States must comply with FCC safety
guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on
FDA and other health agencies for safety questions
about wireless phones.
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless
phone networks rely upon. While these base stations
operate at higher power than do the wireless phones
themselves, the RF exposures that people get from
these base stations are typically thousands of times
lower than those they can get from wireless phones.
Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the
safety questions discussed in this document.
What are the results of the research done
already?
The research done thus far has produced conflicting
results, and many studies have suffered from flaws in
their research methods. Animal experiments
investigating the effects of radio frequency energy
(RF) exposures characteristic of wireless phones
have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be
repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies,
however, have suggested that low levels of RF could
accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory
animals. However, many of the studies that showed
increased tumor development used animals that had
been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-
causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to
develop cancer in absence of RF exposure. Other
studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours
per day. These conditions are not similar to the
conditions under which people use wireless phones,
xlii
so we don't know with certainty what the results of
such studies mean for human health.
Three large epidemiology studies have been
published since December 2000. Between them, the
studies investigated any possible association between
the use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer,
glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of
the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other
cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the
existence of any harmful health effects from wireless
phones RF exposures. However, none of the studies
can answer questions about long-term exposures,
since the average period of phone use in these studies
was around three years.
What research is needed to decide whether
RF exposure from wireless phones poses a
health risk?
A combination of laboratory studies and
epidemiological studies of people actually using
wireless phones would provide some of the data that
are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could
be completed in a few years. However, very large
numbers of animals would be needed to provide
reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one
exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that
is directly applicable to human populations, but ten
or more years' follow-up may be needed to provide
answers about some health effects, such as cancer.
This is because the interval between the time of
exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time
tumors develop - if they do - may be many, many
years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies
is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF
exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones.
Many factors affect this measurement, such as the
angle at which the phone is held, or which model of
phone is used.
xliii
What is FDA doing to find out more about
the possible health effects of wireless phone
RF?
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology
Program and with groups of investigators around the
world to ensure that high priority animal studies are
conducted to address important questions about the
effects of exposure to radio frequency energy
(RF).FDA has been a leading participant in the
World Health Organization international
Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its
inception in 1996. An influential result of this work
has been the development of a detailed agenda of
research needs that has driven the establishment of
new research programs around the world. The
Project has also helped develop a series of public
information documents on EMF issues.
FDA and Cellular Telecommunications & Internet
Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative
Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to
do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides
the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts
in government, industry, and academic organizations.
CTIA-funded research is conducted through
contracts to independent investigators. The initial
research will include both laboratory studies and
studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will
also include a broad assessment of additional
research needs in the context of the latest research
developments around the world.
What steps can I take to reduce my
exposure to radio frequency energy from
my wireless phone?
If there is a risk from these products - and at this
point we do not know that there is - it is probably
very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding
even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps
to minimize your exposure to radio frequency energy
(RF). Since time is a key factor in how much
xliv
exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of
time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF
exposure.
• If you must conduct extended conversations by
wireless phone every day, you could place more
distance between your body and the source of the
RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically
with distance. For example, you could use a
headset and carry the wireless phone away from
your body or use a wireless phone connected to a
remote antenna.
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that
wireless phones are harmful. But if you are
concerned about the RF exposure from these
products, you can use measures like those described
above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless
phone use.
What about children using wireless phones?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to
users of wireless phones, including children and
teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure
to radio frequency energy (RF), the measures
described above would apply to children and
teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time
of wireless phone use and increasing the distance
between the user and the RF source will reduce RF
exposure.
Some groups sponsored by other national
governments have advised that children be
discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For
example, the government in the United Kingdom
distributed leaflets containing such a
recommendation in December 2000. They noted that
no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes
brain tumors or other ill effects. Their
recommendation to limit wireless phone use by
children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
xlv
Do hands-free kits for wireless phones
reduce risks from exposure to RF
emissions?
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to
believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free
kits can be used with wireless phones for
convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the
absorption of RF energy in the head because the
phone, which is the source of the RF emissions, will
not be placed against the head. On the other hand, if
the phone is mounted against the waist or other part
of the body during use, then that part of the body will
absorb more RF energy. Wireless phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet safety requirements
regardless of whether they are used against the head
or against the body. Either configuration should
result in compliance with the safety limit.
Do wireless phone accessories that claim to
shield the head from RF radiation work?
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from wireless phones, there is no reason to
believe that accessories that claim to shield the head
from those emissions reduce risks. Some products
that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use
special phone cases, while others involve nothing
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone.
Studies have shown that these products generally do
not work as advertised. Unlike “hand-free” kits,
these so-called “shields” may interfere with proper
operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to
boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase
in RF absorption. In February 2002, the Federal trade
Commission (FTC) charged two companies that sold
devices that claimed to protect wireless phone users
from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated
claims. According to FTC, these defendants lacked a
reasonable basis to substantiate their claim.
xlvi
What about wireless phone interference
with medical equipment?
Radio frequency energy (RF) from wireless phones
can interact with some electronic devices. For this
reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to
measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of
implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators
from wireless telephones. This test method is now
part of a standard sponsored by the Association for
the Advancement of Medical instrumentation
(AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA,
medical device manufacturers, and many other
groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard
will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac
pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless
phone EMI. FDA has tested wireless phones and
helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by
the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and
performance requirements for hearing aids and
wireless phones so that no interference occurs when
a person uses a compatible phone and a compatible
hearing aid at the same time. This standard was
approved by the IEEE in 2000.
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones
for possible interactions with other medical devices.
Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA
will conduct testing to assess the interference and
work to resolve the problem.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures
from various sources can be obtained from the
following organizations:
• FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/
• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radiation/
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration's
(OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/
radiofrequencyradiation/index.html.
xlvii
• National institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/emfpg.html
• World health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing
Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de
• National Radiation Protection Board (UK):
http://www.nrpb.org.uk
• Updated 4/3/2002: US food and Drug
Administration
http://www.fda.gov/cellphones
Road Safety
Your wireless phone gives you the powerful ability to
communicate by voice, almost anywhere, anytime.
But an important responsibility accompanies the
benefits of wireless phones, one that every user must
uphold.
When driving a car, driving is your first
responsibility. When using your wireless phone
behind the wheel of a car, practice good common
sense and remember the following tips:
1. Get to know your wireless phone and its features,
such as speed dial and redial. If available, these
features help you to place your call without taking
your attention off the road.
2. When available, use a hands-free device. If
possible, add an additional layer of convenience and
safety to your wireless phone with one of the many
hands free accessories available today.
3. Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be
able to access your wireless phone without removing
your eyes from the road. If you get an incoming call
at an inconvenient time, let your voice mail answer it
for you.
4. Let the person you are speaking with know you are
driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic
xlviii
or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow,
ice and even heavy traffic can be hazardous.
5. Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while
driving. Jotting down a “to do” list or flipping
through your address book takes attention away from
your primary responsibility, driving safely.
6.Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible,
place calls when you are not moving or before
pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car
will be stationary. If you need to make a call while
moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and
your mirrors, then continue.
7.Do not engage in stressful or emotional
conversations that may be distracting. Make people
you are talking with aware you are driving and
suspend conversations that have the potential to
divert your attention from the road.
8.Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1
or other local emergency number in the case of fire,
traffic accident or medical emergencies. Remember,
it is a free call on your wireless phone!
9.Use your wireless phone to help others in
emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in
progress or other serious emergency where lives are
in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency
number, as you would want others to do for you.
10.Call roadside assistance or a special non-
emergency wireless assistance number when
necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing
no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor
traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a
vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside
assistance or other special non-emergency number.
“The wireless industry reminds you to
use your phone safely when driving.”
For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE,
or visit our web-site www.wow-com.com Provided
xlix
by the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet
Association
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force
in any area and always switch your phone off
whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may
cause interference or danger. When connecting the
phone or any accessory to another device, read its
user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not
connect incompatible products.
As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment,
users are advised that for the satisfactory operation of
the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is
recommended that the equipment should only be
used in the normal operating position (held to your
ear with the antenna pointing over your shoulder).
Using Your Phone Near Other
Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from
radio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain
electronic equipment may not be shielded against the
RF signals from your wireless phone. Consult the
manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Pacemakers
Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a
minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) be maintained
between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid
potential interference with the pacemaker.
These recommendations are consistent with the
independent research and recommendations of
Wireless Technology Research.
Persons with pacemakers:
• should always keep the phone more than 15 cm (6
inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is
switched on.
• should not carry the phone in a breast pocket.
l
• should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to
minimize potential interference.
If you have any reason to suspect that interference is
taking place, switch your phone off immediately.
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with
some hearing aids. In the event of such interference,
you may wish to consult your hearing aid
manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices,
consult the manufacturer of your device to determine
if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy.
Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining
this information. Switch your phone off in health
care facilities when any regulations posted in these
areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care
facilities may be using equipment that could be
sensitive to external RF energy.
Vehic le s
RF signals may affect improperly installed or
inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor
vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its
representative regarding your vehicle. You should
also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your phone off in any facility where posted
notices require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your phone off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs
and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an
explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even
death.
Users are advised to switch the phone off while at a
refueling point (service station). Users are reminded
li
of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio
equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting
operations are in progress.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are
often but not always clearly marked. They include
below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas
(such as propane or butane), areas where the air
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust or
metal powders, and any other area where you would
normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
Emergency Calls
This phone, like any wireless phone, operates using
radio signals, wireless and landline networks as well
as user programmed functions, which cannot
guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore,
you should never rely solely on any wireless phone
for essential communications (medical emergencies,
for example).
Remember, to make or receive any calls the phone
must be switched on and in a service area with
adequate signal strength. Emergency calls may not
be possible on all wireless phone networks or when
certain network services and/or phone features are in
use. Check with local service providers.
To make an emergency call:
1.If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2.Key in the emergency number for your present
location (for example, 911 or other official
emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by
location.
3.Press [Send]
If certain features are in use (call barring, for
example), you may first need to deactivate those
features before you can make an emergency call.
lii
Consult this document and your local cellular service
provider.
When making an emergency call, remember to give
all the necessary information as accurately as
possible. Remember that your phone may be the only
means of communication at the scene of an accident;
do not cut off the call until given permission to do so.
Restricting Children's access to your
Phone
Your phone is not a toy. Children should not be
allowed to play with it because they could hurt
themselves and others, damage the phone or make
calls that increase your phone bill.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
• This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and,if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
liii
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help
The phone may cause TV or radio interference if
used in close proximity to receiving equipment. The
FCC can require you to stop using the phone if such
interference cannot be eliminated.
Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane) must comply with the National
Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of
this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
Association, One Battery march Park, Quincy, MA
02269, Attn: Publication Sales Division..
Cautions
Changes or modifications made in the radio phone,
not expressly approved by Samsung, will void the
user°Øs authority to operate the equipment.
Only use approved batteries, antennas and chargers.
The use of any unauthorized accessories may be
dangerous and void the phone warranty if said
accessories cause damage or a defect to the phone.
Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid
dropping, hitting, bending or sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information.
• Only qualified personnel should service the phone
or install the phone in a vehicle. Faulty installation
or service may be dangerous and may invalidate
any warranty applicable to the device.
• Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment
in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or
explosive materials in the same compartment as the
phone, its parts or accessories.
• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember
that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not
place objects, including both installed or portable
wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in
liv
the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment
is improperly installed and the air bag inflates,
serious injury could result.
• Switch your phone off before boarding an aircraft.
The use of wireless phone in aircraft is illegal and
may be dangerous to the aircraft's operation.
• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to
the suspension or denial of telephone services to
the offender, or legal action, or both.
Product Performance
Getting the Most Out of Your Signal
Reception
The quality of each call you make or receive depends
on the signal strength in your area. Your phone
informs you of the current signal strength by
displaying a number of bars next to the signal
strength icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger
the signal.
If you're inside a building, being near a window may
give you better reception.Understanding the Power
Save FeatureIf your phone is unable to find a signal
after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save feature
is automatically activated. If your phone is active, it
periodically rechecks service availability or you can
check it yourself by pressing any key.
Anytime the Power Save feature is activated, a
message displays on the screen. When a signal is
found, your phone returns to standby mode.
Understanding How Your Phone
Operates
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and
receiver. When it's turned on, it receives and
transmits radio frequency (RF) signals. When you
use your phone, the system handling your call
controls the power level. This power can range from
0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode.
Maintaining Your Phone's Peak
Performance
lv
For the best care of your phone, only authorized
personnel should service your phone and accessories.
Faulty service may void the warranty.
There are several simple guidelines to operating
your phone properly and maintaining safe,
satisfactory service.
• Hold the phone with the antenna raised, fully-
extended and over your shoulder.
• Try not to hold, bend or twist the phone's antenna.
• Don't use the phone if the antenna is damaged.
• Speak directly into the phone's receiver.
• .Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain
or liquid spills. If your phone does get wet,
immediately turn the power off and remove the
battery. If it is inoperable, call Customer Care for
service.
Availability of Various Features/Ring
Ton es
Many services and features are network dependent
and may require additional subscription and/or usage
charges. Not all features are available for purchase or
use in all areas. Downloadable Ring Tones may be
available at an additional cost. Other conditions and
restrictions may apply. See your service provider for
additional information.
Battery Standby and Talk Time
Standby and talk times will vary depending on phone
usage patterns and conditions. Battery power
consumption depends on factors such as network
configuration, signal strength, operating temperature,
features selected, frequency of calls, and voice, data,
and other application usage patterns.
Battery Precautions
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in
any way.
• Use the battery only for its intended purpose..If you
use the phone near the network's base station, it
uses less power; talk and standby time are greatly
affected by the signal strength on the cellular
network and the parameters set by the network
operator.
lvi
• Battery charging time depends on the remaining
battery charge and the type of battery and charger
used. The battery can be charged and discharged
hundreds of times, but it will gradually wear out.
When the operation time (talk time and standby
time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is time to
buy a new battery.
• If left unused, a fully charged battery will discharge
itself over time.
• Use only Samsung-approved batteries and recharge
your battery only with Samsung-approved
chargers. When a charger is not in use, disconnect
it from the power source. Do not leave the battery
connected to a charger for more than a week, since
overcharging may shorten its life.
• Extreme temperatures will affect the charging
capacity of your battery: it may require cooling or
warming first.
• Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places, such
as in a car in summer or winter conditions, as you
will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery.
Always try to keep the battery at room temperature.
A phone with a hot or cold battery may temporarily
not work, even when the battery is fully charged.
Li-ion batteries are particularly affected by
temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F).
• Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-
circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin,
clip or pen) causes a direct connection between the
+ and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the
battery), for example when you carry a spare
battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the
terminals may damage the battery or the object
causing the short-circuiting.
• Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local
regulations. In some areas, the disposal of batteries
in household or business trash may be prohibited.
For safe disposal options for Li-Ion batteries,
contact your nearest Samsung authorized service
center. Always recycle. Do not dispose of batteries
in a fire.
Care and Maintenance
Your phone is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
lvii
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for
many years.
• Keep the phone and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
• Keep the phone dry. Precipitation, humidity and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
circuits.
• Do not use the phone with a wet hand. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to
the phone.
• Do not use or store the phone in dusty, dirty areas,
as its moving parts may be damaged.
• Do not store the phone in hot areas. High
temperatures can shorten the life of electronic
devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain
plastics.
• Do not store the phone in cold areas. When the
phone warms up to its normal operating
temperature, moisture can form inside the phone,
which may damage the phone's electronic circuit
boards.
• Do not drop, knock or shake the phone. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
• Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents or
strong detergents to clean the phone. Wipe it with a
soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-
water solution.
• Do not paint the phone. Paint can clog the device's
moving parts and prevent proper operation.
• Do not put the phone in or on heating devices, such
as a microwave oven, a stove or a radiator. The
phone may explode when overheated.
• When the phone or battery gets wet, the label
indicating water damage inside the phone changes
color. In this case, phone repairs are no longer
guaranteed by the manufacturer's warranty, even if
the warranty for your phone has not expired.
• If your phone has a flash or light, do not use it too
close to the eyes of people or animals. This may
cause damage to their eyes.
• Use only the supplied or an approved replacement
antenna. Unauthorized antennas or modified
accessories may damage the phone and violate
regulations governing radio devices.
• If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is
not working properly, take it to your nearest
lviii
qualified service facility. The personnel there will
assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.
Getting Started
1-2
Getting Started
1
USIM Card
General Information &
Precautions
Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) Card
is an IC card containing customer and authentication
information, including handset number and limited
storage for Phonebook entries and SMS. Install
USIM Card to use 708SC; turn 708SC power off to
insert/remove USIM Card.
Insert USIM Card into another compatible handset to
access SMS and Phonebook entries saved on USIM
Card. Note the following precautions regarding
USIM Card usage and care (see USIM Card User
Guide for details):
• Avoid using excessive force when Inserting/
removing USIM Card.
• SoftBank is not liable for damages resulting from
inserting USIM Card into IC card readers or other
third party devices.
• Always keep USIM Card IC chip clean.
• Clean USIM Card IC chip with a soft, dry cloth.
• Do not attach labels to USIM Card; malfunction
may result.
IC
USIM Card
1-3
Getting Started
1
1-4
Getting Started
1
Notes
• USIM Card is the property of SoftBank.
• If USIM Card is lost or damaged, you will be
charged for reissuing it.
• Return USIM Card to SoftBank upon
termination of subscription.
• Returned USIM Cards are recycled.
• USIM Card specifications may change without
prior notice.
• If USIM Card or 708SC with USIM Card
inserted is lost or stolen in Japan or abroad,
immediately contact Customer Service ( P.25-
25) to suspend service.
• Handset/USIM Card repairs, replacement or
upgrades may deactivate Chaku-Uta
®
, Chaku-
Uta Full
®
,
S! Appli, or video files on handset.
• Inserting another USIM Card (not the included
one) into 708SC may deactivate preinstalled S!
Appli or Comic Surfing files on handset.
• Back-up USIM Card files. SoftBank is not liable
for lost files.
1-5
Getting Started
1
Inserting & Removing USIM
Card
Always turn power off before opening 708SC to
remove battery, or insert/remove USIM Card.
Inserting
ARemove battery ( P.1-13)
BWith IC chip down, insert USIM
Card into card slot
CPush in USIM Card until it stops and
locks
Removing
ARemove battery ( P.1-13)
BPress down on USIM Card and
gently slide it out
IC
1-6
Getting Started
1
USIM PINs
USIM Card features two (4- to 8-digit) security
codes:
PIN and PIN2.
PIN
Use PIN to prevent unauthorized use of 708SC by
others.
• Modify PIN ( P.13-2).
• When PIN lock is activated, PIN entry is required
each time 708SC is turned on or whenever USIM
Card is re-inserted ( P.13-3).
PIN2
PIN2 is required for Reset Call Cost or Edit Cost
Limit, etc.
• Modify PIN2 ( P.13-2).
Note
• Inserting USIM Card with excessive force may
damage it or 708SC.
• Do not misplace a removed USIM Card.
• To prevent damaging it, avoid touching the IC chip
when Inserting or removing USIM Card. Do not
touch battery contacts.
1-7
Getting Started
1
Canceling PIN Lock (PUK/PUK2
Code)
Incorrectly entering PIN or PIN2 three consecutive
times activates PIN Lock and limits 708SC function
access. Enter PUK (PIN Unlocking Key) Code to
cancel PIN Lock. For more information, contact
Customer Service ( P.25-25).
Note
• Entering PUK or PUK2 incorrectly ten consecutive
times locks USIM Card and deactivates 708SC.
Write down PUK and PUK2.
• Unlocking a locked USIM Card requires a special
procedure. Contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
1-8
Getting Started
1
Handset Parts &
Functions
Handset
aEarpiece/Speaker
bDisplay
cLeft Softkey/Mail Key
Open Messaging menu or execute Left Softkey
command/function.
dCamera/Character Key
Activate Camera or select text entry mode.
eStart Key
Initiate and receive Voice Calls.
aEarpiece/
Speaker
bDisplay
cw
de
et
fC
g*
hRotating Camer
a
iudlr
jo
ki
lc
my
n0~9
o#
pMicrophone
qInternal
rSub Display
sn
tb
vBattery Cover
uCharger/External
Device
1-9
Getting Started
1
fClear/Back Key
Delete entered text or return to the previous window.
g Key
Enter line breaks in text entry windows.
In Standby, press for 1+ seconds to open Phone
Profiles.
hCamera
Capture images or send video during a Video Call.
iMulti Selector
Select menu items, move cursor, scroll window.
jRight Softkey/Yahoo! Keitai Key
Access Yahoo! Keitai or execute Right Softkey
command/function.
kSwitch Bar Key
Display Switch Bar ( P.1-22).
lCenter Key
Open Main Menu or execute Center Softkey command/
function.
mPower/End Key
Turn power on/off or end operations.
nKeypad
Enter numbers or characters and select menu items.
o#/Manner Key
Toggle Symbols menus in text entry windows.
In Standby, press for 1+ seconds to activate/cancel
Manner Profile.
pMicrophone
qInternal Antenna
rSub Display
sn(Side Key)
Raise volume. Alternatively, enlarge the image during a
Video Call.
tb(Side Key)
Lower volume. Alternatively, reduce the image during
a Video Call.
uCharger/External Device Port
Connect Charger, Stereo Earphone Microphone, USB
Cable, etc. here.
vBattery Cover
Opened to insert/remove battery or USIM Card.
1-10
Getting Started
1
Display Indicators
aSignal Strength (more bars indicate
stronger signal)
Out-of-Range (outside service area or no
signal when Language is set to English or
)
Out-of-Range (When Language is set to
)
Tip
• Internal Antenna
708SC has no external antenna. 708SC transmits and
receives signals via Internal Antenna. Do not cover or
place stickers, etc. over the area containing Internal
Antenna. Voice quality may vary by where/how 708SC
is used.
abcdf
eg
i
h
日本語
1-11
Getting Started
1
b3G (UMTS) network connected/roaming
GSM network connected/roaming
Web SSL connected
c(Blue) Bluetooth® Active
(Flashing in Blue & Pink) Bluetooth®
Transmission
Bluetooth® Packet Data transmission
Bluetooth®-compatible headset connected
(Blue) USB Connected
(Flashing in Orange & Yellow) USB Active
S! Appli Active
S! Appli Paused
Packet Data transmission
dVoice Call in Progress
Video Call in Progress
eNew S! Mail
New SMS
New Voice Mail
Unheard Answer Machine Message
Software Update Required
fNormal Profile
Manner Profile
Car Profile
Meeting Profile
Outdoor Profile
Offline Profile
gBattery Strong
Battery Moderate
Battery Low
(Flashing) Battery Weak (Charge Now)
hSound settings: Other than Off for Voice Call
in Ringtone volume Set; and On for Voice Call
in Vibration Set
Sound settings: Other than Off for Voice Call
in Ringtone volume Set; and Off for Voice Call
in Vibration Set
Sound settings: Off for Voice Call in Ringtone
volume Set; and On for Voice Call in Vibration
Set
Sound settings: Off for Voice Call in Ringtone
volume Set and Vibration Set
1-12
Getting Started
1
iRoaming Active
Voice Mail/Call Forwarding Active
Answer Machine Active
S! Mail Memory Full
SMS Memory Full
Voice Mail Memory Full
Wake-up Alarm/Alarm Set
Sub Display
a Signal Strength
(more bars indicate stronger signal)
b Wake-up Alarm/Alarm Set
c New Message
d Manner Profile Set; and On for Voice Call in
Vibration Set
e Battery Strong
Battery Moderate
Battery Low
Battery Weak (Charge Now)
Battery & Charger
Before Using Battery or
Charger
Charge battery before first use of 708SC or after
periods of disuse.
Tip
• When (Red) appears, only packet data
transmission and S! Mail sending are available;
Voice Call, received S! Mail notification, and SMS
sending/receiving are disabled.
a bcd e
1-13
Getting Started
1
Charging Battery
• Long periods of disuse may affect battery's ability
to hold a full charge.
• 708SC uses a lithium-ion battery; charge battery in
any state without damaging its ability to hold a
charge.
• Do not charge battery under the following
conditions:
-Where the ambient temperature is below 5°C or
above 40°C
-Where there are high levels of humidity,
vibrations or dust
-Near a radio receiver (May cause feedback)
• 708SC or Charger may warm while charging. This
is normal, however, should they become very hot
to the touch, stop charging and contact Customer
Service ( P.25-25).
• Charge battery at least once every six months
while not in use. Otherwise, battery may become
unusable.
• Battery is a consumable; replace it if operating
time shortens noticeably.
1-14
Getting Started
1
Battery Life
Battery time/life may be reduced by any of the
following:
• Environmental Factors
-Storing/using 708SC in places with ambient
temperature or above 5°C below 40°C
-Using 708SC in when signal is poor/leaving it
on out-of-range
-Allowing debris to collect on 708SC, battery or
Charger Port
• Operational Factors
-Active S! Appli
-Camera use
-Media Player use
-Excessive Keypad use (e.g. for gaming or
messaging, etc.)
-Bluetooth® transmissions
-Frequently opening and closing 708SC
• Settings
-Using Slide Show
-Setting Brightness higher or Backlight Time
longer
-Using Media Player with Backlight set to
Always on
Battery Disposal
Do not dispose of exhausted batteries with ordinary
refuse. Tape over battery terminals before disposal or
take to a SoftBank shop. Follow any and all local
regulations regarding battery disposal.
Lithium-ion batteries are recyclable.
Note
• Use specified Charger only.
• Battery must be inside 708SC to charge it.
• When not in use, unplug Charger from outlet or
cigarette lighter socket.
1-15
Getting Started
1
When Battery Runs Out
When battery is weak, a warning appears and 708SC
beeps. Charge or replace battery; otherwise 708SC
will automatically turn off.
Inserting & Removing Battery
Inserting
APress Battery Cover and slide as
shown
BFully remove Battery Cover as shown
CAlign Battery Slots and 708SC Tabs
to insert battery as shown
a
b
a
b
708SC Tabs
1-16
Getting Started
1
DInsert Battery Cover Tabs into 708SC
Slots to attach Battery Cover as
shown
Removing
Always turn 708SC off before removing battery.
Never remove battery while AC Charger or In-Car
Charger is connected.
APress Battery Cover and slide as
shown
BFully remove Battery Cover as shown
Note
• Remove battery cover with care; stress on tabs may
damage them.
• Gently insert battery to avoid damaging 708SC
tabs.
Battery Cover Tabs a
b
1-17
Getting Started
1
CLift battery up and remove as shown
AC Charger
Use specified Charger only.
AOpen Port Cover and insert Charger
Connector into the port
BPlug Charger into an AC 100V outlet
CWhen battery is charged, unplug
Charger from outlet, then from
708SC
Port Cover
Charger Connector
(with △ mark
upward)
Charge
AC 100V
1-18
Getting Started
1
Charging via PC USB Port
Battery will charge when 708SC is connected to a PC
via included USB cable.
aOpen Port Cover and insert USB Cable Connector
bInsert USB Connector into a PC USB port
cWhen battery is charged, remove Connector from
708SC and replace Port Cover, then remove USB
Connector from the PC USB port
Charging via USB takes more time; charging time will
vary by PC. A weak battery may not charge via a PC
USB port.
In-Car Charger (Optional)
AOpen Port Cover and insert
Connector Plug
BInsert Charger Connector into
lighter socket
Tip
• Battery Charged Confirmation
When 708SC is on while Charger is connected, battery
indicators flash when battery is fully charged.
While charging, battery indicators change as follows:
→→.
If 708SC is off while Charger is connected, battery
indicator and graphic appear full on Sub Display &
Battery full appears above graphic on Display when
battery is fully charged. Otherwise, Charging...
appears above animation on Display.
•Charging Time
An empty battery requires 120 minutes (approx.) to
charge when power on and Display off (no operation).
Longer when Display on. Charging time may vary by
ambient temperature.
Port Cover
Charger
Connector
(with △ mark
1-19
Getting Started
1
CStart the car's engine
DWhen battery is charged, remove In-
Car Charger Connector, replace Port
Cover, then remove Charger
Connector from lighter socket
Power On/Off
Power On
AOpen 708SC
BPress y for 1+ seconds
In-Car
Charger
Lighter Socket Tip
• Battery Charged Confirmation ( P.1-15)
• Charging Time ( P.1-15)
• When using In-Car Charger
See In-Car Charger manual. For safety, use In-Car
Holder together with In-Car Charger.
Note
• Do not charge battery in ambient temperatures
over 40°C (e.g. inside a closed automobile in direct
sunlight, etc.).
• Use In-Car Charger in cars with minus-earth only
(DC 12/24V).
1-20
Getting Started
1
Power Off
APress y for 2+ seconds
Time & Date
Time & Date
Some 708SC functions cannot be used unless time
and date are set. Open Time & Date to change Time
Format or Date Format.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →Time & date
BAdjust settings
To set time
Tip
• To confirm handset phone number
In Standby, press c→0; save or edit your
information in My Phonebook Details including name
and mail address ( P.5-16).
• When PIN lock is activated
PIN entry is required each time 708SC is turned on.
• When 708SC is left open without operations
Display automatically shuts down to conserve power.
Note
• Use both hands to open and close 708SC; avoid
using excessive force which could damage handset
or lead to malfunctions.
Standby
Default
Setting
■Time format: 24H
■ Date format: YYYY/MM/DD
1-21
Getting Started
1
Highlight Time field and enter the time (24-hour
format)
To set AM/PM (for 12-hour format)
aHighlight Time field and press r twice for
AM/PM option
bUse r to toggle AM and PM
To set date
Highlight Date field and enter the year, month,
and day
To change time format
aSelect Time format field
bSelect the setting and press c
To change date format
aSelect Date format field
bSelect the setting and press c
CPress w (Save)
Time Zone Updating
Automatically update 708SC Date & Time using
server's time zone information.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →Time & Date
BSelect Time zone updating and
perform operations to set
CPress w (Save)
Default
Setting
■Prompt first
1-22
Getting Started
1
Changing Home Time Zone
Change time zone to the place you use handset.
Daylight saving time can also be set.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →Time & date
BSelect Home zone field
CPerform operations to set
To set home time zone
aUse s to specify a target area
bPress c
To set daylight saving time
aCheck Daylight saving
bPress w (OK)
DPress w (Save)
Tip
• The contents of Time zone updating are:
Manual only: Automatic update unavailable.
Prompt first: When moving to the country/district with
different time zone, update Time & Date according to
the current time zone.
Automatic: After set to this setting, 708SC turns the
power off and on automatically; and update Time &
Date according to the server's time zone information
(Home time zone, Date, Time, etc.). Note that the
information availability varies by network. If no
information are available, use one of above settings.
Default
Setting
■Home zone: GMT+9h
■ Daylight saving: Unchecked
1-23
Getting Started
1
708SC Menus
Main Menu
AIn Standby, press c
BHighlight an item and press c
(Select)
CRepeat Step 2 to open/activate the
target function
<Example> Select Display settings →Wallpaper
Main Menu
Select Display
settings
Select Settings
Select Wallpaper
Pictures
Wallpaper Setup
Window appears
1-24
Getting Started
1
When Popup Menu ( P.8-6) is On
Display is different (Step 2), however operations remain
the same.
Selecting items with Keypad
When numbered items appear in menus, etc., use
keypad to select them.
Shortcuts
In Standby, press a key to open the assigned shortcut.
* Create shortcuts for frequently used functions in Idle
shortcut ( P.15-7).
Tip
• To end an operation
Press y. Operation ends and 708SC returns to
Standby. When multiple functions are active, the next
active operation window appears.
• To cancel/escape an operation
Press y. Operation/function is canceled and 708SC
returns to Standby or the previous window appears. For
some menus, a confirmation appears.
• Menu operations ( P.xiv)
Key Corresponding Menu/Function
wMessaging
oYahoo! Keitai Main Menu
o
(1+ seconds) Yahoo! Keitai Menu
eMobile Camera (last used function)
iSwitch Bar
uIdle shortcut*
dPhonebook list
lCall Log (Received)
rCall Log (Dialled)
tCall Log (Current Contacts)
*
(1+ seconds) Phone Profiles
#
(1+ seconds) Activate/Cancel Manner Profile
1-25
Getting Started
1
Switch Bar
Initiate Call,Messaging,Yahoo! Keitai, or Media
Player; use multiple functions concurrently (e.g.,
create a message while listening to music, or browse
the Mobile Internet while talking on the phone).
AIn Standby or an active function
window, press i
BUse s to highlight a function and
press c (Select)
To exit an active function
From the window of the function to exit, press
y
To exit all active functions
aPress i
bUse s to highlight End all? and press c
(Yes)
Options
When Options appears at bottom-right of Display,
press o to open Options. To execute an option,
highlight the item and press c (Select).
Tip
• When exiting all active functions
Even if during message creation or mobile Internet site
access via Yahoo! Keitai, all active functions ends at
once without confirmation messages. Press y once
for each function to exit after confirmation. Exiting all
active functions during message creation or voice/
video recording, also deletes created/recorded data.
Tip
• See "Options" ( P.xiv)
1-26
Getting Started
1
Security Codes
Phone Password, Center Access Code and Network
Password are required to use 708SC.
Phone Password
"9999" is set by default; required to use/change some
708SC functions.
• Entered digits are represented with*
• If incorrect, an error message appears; try again.
• Change Phone Password as required
Center Access Code
The 4-digit number specified at subscription;
required for Optional Services or to subscribe to fee-
based Web information services.
For details, contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
Network Password
"9999" is set by default; required to restrict handset
services. Entering Network Password incorrectly
three consecutive times locks Call Barring settings.
To resolve, Network Password and Center Access
Code must be changed. For details, contact Customer
Service
( P.25-25).
• Network Password can be changed on 708SC
(P.16-13).
Note
• Write down Phone Password, Center Access Code,
or Network Password. If you forget any of these
codes contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
• Do not reveal Phone Password, Center Access
Code, or Network Password to others. SoftBank is
not liable for damages caused by misuse of these
codes by others.
Basic Handset Operations
2-2
Basic Handset Operations
2
Initiating a Call
See P.5-9 to call from a Phonebook entry or P.6-2 for
Video Calls.
AEnter a phone number
When Phonebook list appears ( P.5-11)
To use Speed Dialing ( P.5-12)
BConfirm the number and press t
CPress y to end the call
Placing international calls from Japan
A separate subscription is required for international
calls.
aEnter a phone number
bSelect Options →International dial
cSelect country or Enter Code for direct entry
dSelect Japan
eConfirm the number and press t
Using a SoftBank handset overseas
Enter handset phone number; country code is not
required.
Calling from overseas ( P.2-14)
Tip
• To correct entered digits
Press C to delete the last digit. Press C for 1+
seconds to delete all.
• When the line is busy
Press y to end the call and try again later. If Auto
Redial is active, number is automatically redialed.
Press o (Cancel) or y to cancel.
• When Stereo Earphone Microphone is connected
Enter a number and press Stereo Earphone Microphone
switch for 1+ seconds to initiate a call. When
Earphone call is set to On, press switch for 1+ seconds
to call specified number. Press switch for 1+ seconds to
end a call.
• Engaged Call Operations ( P.2-7)
2-3
Basic Handset Operations
2
Options Receiving a Call
AWhen 708SC rings/vibrates, press
t or c (Accept)
BPress y to end the call
Item Description
Video call Initiate a Video Call.
Add to
Phonebook
Save a number to Phonebook or
USIM Card Phonebook ( P.5-6).
Create msg Open a new message addressed to
the number ( P.17-6).
Phonebook Open Phonebook Search window.
Call log Open Call Log.
International dial
Add international code and
country code to a number ( P.2-
2).
Hide/Show my ID
Initiate a Voice/Video Call with
your number Shown/Hidden.
Select None to follow Caller ID
settings. Select Show my ID to
show your number. Select Hide
my ID to hide your number.
Tip
• When Anykey Answer is set to On
Press any key except w,o,y, or Side Key nb
to answer Voice Calls.
• To mute 708SC ringer for an incoming call
While 708SC rings/vibrates, press w (Mute); caller
continues to hear ringback tone. To answer the call,
press c (Accept).
• To adjust ringer volume
While 708SC rings/vibrates, press Side Key n or b.
• When Stereo Earphone Microphone is connected
When 708SC rings/vibrates, press Stereo Earphone
Microphone switch for 1+ seconds to accept a call.
Press again for 1+ seconds to end the call.
• Engaged Call Operations ( P.2-7)
2-4
Basic Handset Operations
2
Ringtones
Specify ringtones for saved numbers by Phonebook
entry or Category ( P.5-4, 5-7). When no ringtone is
set, 708SC rings according to Profile Settings ( P.9-2).
Under following conditions, 708SC rings according to
each Mode; Secret Mode is set to Hide and
Phonebook(contains caller's number as an entry)'s
Secret Mode is set to On.
Incoming call window
If caller sends Caller ID, phone number appears; if
saved in Phonebook, name appears. When an image is
set in Phonebook or Category, image also appears
( P.5-4, 5-7). If caller hides Caller ID, Withheld
appears.
Under following conditions, no name/image appears;
Secret Mode is set to Hide and Phonebook(contains
caller's number as an entry)'s Secret Mode is set to On.
Missed call window
After an unanswered incoming call, Missed call
window appears. Press w (View), to open Missed Call
Log ( P.2-9).
When you cannot answer a call
Use Call Forwarding/Voice Mail to forward incoming
calls to a specified number automatically/to save
messages at Voice Mail Center. When Call Forwarding
or Voice Mail is set to No reply, press o (Busy) to
forward an incoming call immediately ( P.16-3, 16-5).
Use Answer Machine to record caller messages. Up to 3
messages (15 seconds per message) can be recorded in
708SC ( P.2-5).
Reject Incoming Call
Proactively disconnect an incoming call without
answering it. The rejected call is recorded in Missed.
AWhile 708SC rings/vibrates, press
y
2-5
Basic Handset Operations
2
Answer Machine
Record caller messages on handset. Up to 3 messages
(15 seconds per message) can be recorded.
Activating & Canceling
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Answer machine →Setting
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
With Answer Machine set
In Standby, appears.
Tip
• When Side Key is set to Reject
Reject an incoming call by pressing Side Key n or b
for 1+ seconds.
• To reject call and send a busy message
When neither Call Forwarding ( P.16-2) nor Voice
Mail ( P.16-2) is active, press o (Busy) to
proactively disconnect a call without answering it;
"busy" message appears on the caller's handset before
the call is disconnected. If the caller's handset is
incompatible the call is simply disconnected.
• To automatically reject a call ( P.13-8)
Default
Setting
■Off
Note
• Answer Machine cannot be used when handset is
off, out-of-range or in Offline mode. Use Voice Mail
to record caller messages while incoming
transmissions are blocked.
• If the free space of the shared memory ( P.25-15)
on 708SC is less than 600K bytes, you cannot use
Answer Machine.
2-6
Basic Handset Operations
2
Ringing Duration
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Answer machine →
Ringing duration
BSelect an item or Other (0-60Secs) to
set a time
CPress c (Save)
Sound Language
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Answer machine →Sound
language
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Checking Recordings
When Answer Machine records caller messages,
appears in Display.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Answer machine →
Recordings
BHighlight the message to check and
press c (Play)
Default
Setting
■10 seconds
Default
Setting
■日本語
Tip
• To delete messages
Highlight the message to delete, press w (Delete)
and select Yes.
2-7
Basic Handset Operations
2
Engaged Call Operations
Earpiece Volume
Adjust Earpiece or Earphone volume. Setting
remains even after power off.
ADuring a call, press Side Key n or b
Hold
When a call is put on hold, the party on hold hears a
hold tone and neither party can hear the other's voice.
A subscription to Call Waiting ( P.16-8) or
Conference Call ( P.16-9) is required before calls
can be placed on hold.
ADuring a call, press w (Hold)
BPress w (Retrieve) to reconnect the
call
Speaker Phone
ADuring a call, press c ( ) and
select Yes
To cancel Speaker Phone
Press c ()
Voice Recording
Record voice of a maximum of 2 minutes during a
call.
ADuring a call, select Options →
Record
BPress c (Record)
2-8
Basic Handset Operations
2
CPerform operations to stop/pause
To stop and save
Press w (Stop)
To pause and save
aPress c (Pause)
bPress c (Record) to restart recording; press
w (Save) to end recording
Engaged Call Options
Tip
• Recorded voice
Recorded voice files are saved to Sounds & Ringtones
folder in Data Folder.
• When another party calls during recording
With Call Waiting subscription, stops ongoing
recording and incoming call window appears.
• When 708SC ends a call during recording
708SC stops recording automatically and saves the
voice files.
Item Description
Whisper on/off
With On, raise the volume of sent
sounds even when lowering your
voice.
Mute
Check Voice or Key tone and press
w (OK) to cancel sending no sounds
or key tones.
New call
Enter a number and press c (Call) to
initiate another call; requires a
subscription to Conference Call
( P.16-9).
Phonebook Open Phonebook Search window.
Add to
Phonebook
Save number to Phonebook or USIM
Card Phonebook ( P.5-6).
Create msg Open a new message addressed to the
number ( P.17-6).
Send DTMF Enter digits then press c (Send) to
send tones.
Record Record caller's voice during a call
( P.2-7).
2-9
Basic Handset Operations
2
Call Log Records
Viewing Call Log Records
APress r
BUse s to select a Call Log
To confirm the number and call duration for
a record
Highlight an item and press c (View)
Call Log Record Indicators
: Voice Call to/from a number
saved in Phonebook
: Call to/from a number saved in USIM Card
Phonebook
: Voice Call to/from an unsaved number
: Video Call to/from a number saved in Phonebook
Current Contacts (all incoming/outgoing calls)
Indicators
: Received call : Rejected incoming call
: Missed call : Dialed call
Calling from Call Log Records
Memo Create and save text memos ( P.14-
10).
End call Disconnect call.
Switch to
headset/Switch
to phone
Appears when Bluetooth®-compatible
headset is in use. Select headset or
phone (handset).
Current
contacts All incoming and outgoing calls
Missed All missed incoming calls
Received All received incoming calls
Dialled All outgoing calls
Item Description
Tip
• While Secret Mode is set to Hide
Phonebook(contains a Call Log record's number as an
entry)'s Secret Mode is set to On; the name of a Call
Log record does not appear.
2-10
Basic Handset Operations
2
APress r
BUse s to select a Call Log
CHighlight a record and press t
To initiate a Video Call
Select Options →Video call
Deleting Call Log Records
Deleting One Record
Delete one Call Log record.
APress r
BUse s to select a Call Log
CHighlight a record, select Options →
Delete →Selected →Yes
Tip
• To delete individual calls from records
aPerform Steps 1 and 2
bHighlight a record and press c (View)
cHighlight a call, select Options →Delete →
Selected →Yes
2-11
Basic Handset Operations
2
Deleting All Records
Delete all Call Log records at once.
APress r
Use s to select Current contacts
BSelect Options →Delete →All →Yes
CEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
Call Log Options
Call Manager
Item Description
Voice call Initiate a Voice Call to the current
number.
Video call Initiate a Video Call to the current
number ( P.2-9).
Add to
Phonebook
Save number to Phonebook or USIM
Card Phonebook ( P.5-6).
Create msg Open a new message addressed to the
current number ( P.17-6).
Delete Delete the current Call Log record
( P.2-10).
Add to black list Add the number to Black List
( P.13-9).
View phonebook
details Open Entry details for a number.
International dial Add international code and country
code to the number ( P.2-2).
Hide/Show my
ID
Initiate a Voice/Video Call with your
number Shown/Hidden. Select None
to follow Caller ID settings. Select
Show my ID to show your number.
Select Hide my ID to hide your
number.
Data counter Confirm/reset incoming/outgoing data
volume.
Call costs
Confirm/reset Total Costs, Last Call
Cost or Cost Limit; change Call Costs
currency unit.
Item Description
2-12
Basic Handset Operations
2Data Counter, Call Costs, &
Call Times
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Call manager
BSelect an item
To reset Data counter
aIn Data counter, highlight item to reset, select
Options →Reset
bSelect Yes
To reset all Data counter
aIn Data counter, highlight item to reset, select
Options →Reset all
bEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm), and select Yes
To reset Call Costs
aIn Call Costs, select Options →Reset call
cost
bEnter PIN2 and press c (Confirm)
Call times Confirm/reset incoming/outgoing
Voice/Video Call Times.
2-13
Basic Handset Operations
2
To reset Call Times
aIn Call Times, highlight item to reset, select
Options →Reset →Yes
To reset all Call Times
aIn Call Times, highlight item to reset, select
Options →Reset all
bEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm) →Yes
To change Call Costs currency unit
aIn Call Costs, select Options →Setup
currency
bEnter PIN2 and press c (Confirm)
cHighlight Price field to enter a price in Yen
dHighlight Currency field and enter the
currency unit.
ePress w (Save)
Edit Cost Limit
After reaching the call cost limit, only emergency
calls ( P.2-15) can be initiated; messaging, web
connections (fee-based operations) are disabled.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Call manager
BSelect Call costs
CSelect Options →Edit cost limit
DEnter PIN2 and press c (Confirm)
EEnter limit
Display Call Cost during a Call
Default
Setting
■ Off
2-14
Basic Handset Operations
2
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Call manager →Display
call cost
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
International Roaming
A separate subscription is required for international
calls. Contact Customer Service for more
information about international roaming.
Changing Network Mode
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Network mode
BSelect the setting
Network Setup
Selecting a Network
Select a network (operator) by location or use
automatic setting.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Network selection
BSelect the setting
To select automatically
Select Automatic
Default
Setting
■ 3G
Tip
• The contents of Network mode are:
Automatic: Network is set automatically by location.
GSM 900/1800: Available overseas.
GSM 1900: Available overseas.
3G: Available domestically and overseas.
Default
Setting
■Automatic
2-15
Basic Handset Operations
2
To select a specific network
aSelect Manual
bSelect a network
Preferred Networks
Insert networks into Preferred Networks list or add
them to the end. Select networks from Network List
or create new network entries.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Preferred networks
BEdit Preferred Networks
To insert/add a network from Network List
aWhen inserting, highlight insert position
bSelect Options →Insert or Add →
Network list
cSelect a network and press c (Insert/Add)
To insert/add a new network
aWhen inserting, highlight insert position
bSelect Options →Insert or Add →New
network
cEnter network settings and press w (Insert/
Add)
To delete a network from Preferred
Networks
Highlight network to delete, select Options →
Delete →Yes
Calling from Outside Japan
AEnter phone number including area
code
Tip
• New Network Settings
Country code Up to 3 digits
Network code Up to 3 digits
Network name Up to 20 single-byte alphanumerics
Network type GSM or 3G
2-16
Basic Handset Operations
2
To call an in-country landline or mobile
phone
Proceed to Step 5
To enter country code, etc. directly
Press 0 for 1+ seconds to enter +, enter
country code and phone number omitting the
first 0 (except when calling landlines in Italy)
and proceed to Step 5
BSelect Options →International dial
CSelect country or Enter Code for
direct entry
DSelect Abroad
EConfirm number and press t
Emergency Calls
Some emergency numbers (110 (Police), 119 (Fire),
etc.) are available even when certain Call Barring
settings are active. See details below.
Tip
• To change/add International code or country code
( P.15-2)
708SC Status Available Numbers
Offline mode ( P.3-4) is active. None
Call Cost limit exceeded ( P.2-
12). 110, 119, 118
708SC is locked ( P.13-5). None
Required PIN not entered ( P.13-
3). None
USIM Card cannot be
authenticated ( P.13-4). None
Outgoing Call Barring ( P.16-11)
is active. 110, 119, 118
Note
• SoftBank can not guarantee connections in all
countries and regions. Handset operations may
vary by network, signal, or function settings.
2-17
2-18
Basic Handset Operations
2
Manner Profile
3-2
Manner Profile
3
Minding Mobile Manners
Please take care not to disturb others when using
your handset.
• Turn 708SC off in theaters, museums, and other
places where silence is the norm.
• Keep 708SC off aboard airplanes, inside hospitals,
or in other places where handset use is prohibited.
• Refrain from using 708SC in places such as
restaurants, hotel lobbies, or elevators.
• Observe announcements or posted instructions
regarding handset use aboard trains, etc.
• Refrain from handset use that interrupts the flow of
pedestrian or vehicle traffic.
Manner Related Functions
708SC offers two manner-related profiles.
Manner Profile:
Silence 708SC sounds and activate Vibration for all
alerts, tones, and alarms. Use Manner Key to activate
or cancel Manner Profile.
Offline Profile:
Temporarily suspend 708SC transmissions; other
708SC functions may still be used while Offline
Profile is active.
Muting/vibrating 708SC can be selected respectively
for alert tone, ringtone, or alarm in Sound settings
other than Manner/Offline profile.
3-3
Manner Profile
3
Manner Profile
AIn Standby, press # for 1+
seconds
Changing Profile
708SC features five Profiles, including Manner
Profile.
AIn Standby, press * for 1+
seconds
BSelect a Profile
CPress c (Save)
Profiles
Select a Profile depending on usage and edit settings as
required ( P.9-2).
Tip
• When Manner Profile is active
appears.
• Even when Manner Profile is active, shutter click
sounds for Camera.
Tip
• To change 708SC Profile ( P.9-2)
Profile Description
Normal Normal sounds produced by 708SC
Manner No sounds produced by 708SC
Car
Set Automatic reception of Voice
Calls and activation of Speaker
Phone for use while driving
Meeting Ringtone or Key tone preset to
Vibration or Mute
Outdoor Ringtone or Key tone preset to
maximum sound volume
3-4
Manner Profile
3
Offline Mode
APress c and select Settings→Call
settings →Offline mode
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■Off
Tip
• Turning 708SC Off with Offline mode active
When turning on again, a confirmation for use of
Offline mode appears. Press o (No) to select Normal
Profile.
Entering Text
4-2
Entering Text
4
Text Entry
Enter kanji/hiragana/hangul, single- or double-byte
katakana, alphanumerics, or symbols/pictograms/
emoticons.
Text Entry Window
*Suggestions appear only in Kanji/Hiragana mode, when
Prediction setting is On.
Number Only Text Entry Fields
Text entry windows do not appear for Phonebook Phone
fields or Alarm Time fields; enter numbers directly into
these fields.
Changing Text Entry Mode
Text Entry modes may be limited in some text entry
fields or windows.
AIn a text entry window, press e
BHighlight entry mode and press c
Current Entry Mode
: Kanji/Hiragana
: Double-byte Katakana
: Double-byte
Alphanumerics
: Double-byte Numbers
: Double-byte Symbols
: Pictograms : Emoticons
: Hangul
Number of characters that still can be entered
Text entry field
: Single-byte
Alphanumerics
: Single-byte Kataka
n
: Single-byte
: Single-byte
Text entry field
Suggestions*
Japanese kana conversion alternatives
Tip
4-3
Entering Text
4
Key Assignments
Multiple characters are assigned to each key. Press a key repeatedly until the target character appears.
Press * to add ゛or ゜ to kana or enter line breaks and # to toggle symbols.
• To toggle symbols
In text entry windows, press # to toggle Symbols,
Pictograms, and Emoticons.
Key Kanji/Hiragana Katakana Alphanumerics Numbers
1あいうえおぁぃぅぇぉ1 アイウエオァィゥェォ 1 .@-_/:~111
2かきくけこ2 カキクケコ2 abcABC2 2
3さしすせそ3 サシスセソ3 defDEF3 3
4たちつてとっ 4 タチツテトッ 4 ghiGHI4 4
5なにぬねの5 ナニヌネノ5 jklJKL5 5
6はひふへほ6 ハヒフヘホ6 mnoMNO6 6
7まみむめも7 マミムメモ7 pqrsPQRS7 7
8やゆよゃゅょ 8 ヤユヨャュョ 8 tuvTUV8 8
9らりるれろ9 ラリルレロ9 wxyzWXYZ9 9
0わをんゎ、。−・∼！？
〈Space〉0 ワヲンヮ2、。−・∼！？
〈Space〉0 ,.-_!?〈Space〉0 0
*• Toggle between upper- and lower-case or add ゛or ゜
to unfixed, convertible kana
• Enter Line Break
• Toggle between upper-
and lower-case
• Enter Line Break
Enter Line Break
4-4
Entering Text
4
1 When double-byte, "~" cannot be used ("∼"appears on Display).
2 Single-byte "ヮ" (lower case) cannot be entered.
#• Reverse toggle characters assigned to the same key before finalizing character
selection
• Toggle Pictograms, Double-byte Symbols, Single-byte Symbols, Emoticons
Toggle Pictograms,
Double-byte Symbols,
Single-byte Symbols,
Emoticons
Key Kanji/Hiragana Katakana Alphanumerics Numbers
4-5
Entering Text
4
When calls/alarms interrupt text entry
Answer incoming calls without saving text first;
disconnect call to return to text entry window. Similarly,
close Alarm window to return to text entry window.
Entering Characters
Hiragana/Kanji
Enter hiragana/kanji with or without conversion
predictions. When Prediction setting is On,
Suggestions appear below text entry window.
AActivate Kanji/Kana entry mode to
enter hiragana
To add ゛or ゜
Enter a valid character and press *
To correct a misentry
Use C to delete the character then enter the
correction
When key is pressed too many times
Press # to return to the previous character
assigned to the same key
To enter consecutive characters assigned to
the same key
Press r to move cursor to the right
To enter unconverted hiragana
Press c (Confirm)
4-6
Entering Text
4
BConvert hiragana
To select a conversion from Suggestions
aPress d to move between Suggestions
bHighlight a conversion and press c
(Confirm)
When the desired conversion does not appear
aPress w (Convert)
bUse s to change the conversion range
cPress d to move to Suggestions
dHighlight a conversion and press c
(Confirm)
eRepeat steps b through d as required
Tip
• When characters do not convert to the intended
Kanji
Try entering different readings of the Kanji. When
multiple Kanji characters do not convert together, try
to convert them separately.
• To switch the contents in Suggestions between a
predicted/conversion alternatives
If you press w (Convert) while predicted alternatives
are displayed, conversion alternative will be displayed,
and if you press w (Predict) while conversion
alternatives are displayed, predicted alternatives
appear.
• To set/release the prediction entry function
( P.4-14)
• To convert easily by using User dictionary ( P.4-15)
• To enter date/time
aPress a key to enter a key to which numbers are
assigned
bPress o (EngNumｶﾅ)
cHighlight a conversion alternative and press c
(Confirm)
4-7
Entering Text
4
Resetting Text Entry History
As for predicted/conversion alternatives, character
strings/kanji converted in the past take priority to
appear. Restore the displayed contents to defaults.
aPress c and select Settings →Phone settings →
User dictionary →Reset learning
bEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) and
select Yes
Katakana
AIn Katakana mode, press a key to
enter the assigned character
To add ゛or ゜
Enter a Katakana to which a voiced or semi-
voiced sound symbol should be added and press
*
To correct a misentry
Use C to delete the character and press the
correct key
When key is pressed too many times
Press # to return to the previous character
assigned to the same key
To enter consecutive characters assigned to
the same key
Press r to move cursor to the right
4-8
Entering Text
4
Alphanumerics
AIn Alphanumerics entry mode, press
a key to enter the assigned character
To toggle upper and lower case
Enter a character and press *
To correct a misentry
Use C to delete the character and press the
correct key
When key is pressed too many times
Press # to return to a previous character
assigned to the same key
Tip
• To enter Katakana in Kanji/Kana entry mode
For example, to convert "くも" to "クモ" or "ｸﾓ".
aIn Kanji/Kana entry mode, enter hiragana
bPress o (EngNumｶﾅ)
cHighlight katakana conversion alternative and press
c (Confirm)
4-9
Entering Text
4
To enter consecutive characters assigned to
the same key
Press r to move cursor to the right
Numbers
AIn Number entry mode, press
number keys
To correct a misentry
Use C to delete the entry, then enter
correction
Tip
• To enter alphanumerics in Kanji/Kana entry mode
Press key(s) assigned to alphanumerics as many times
as it would take to enter same character(s) in
Alphanumerics mode. For example, press 2 three
times and press 3 once to enter "cd."
aIn Kanji/Kana entry mode, press a key to which
alphanumerics are assigned
bPress o (EngNumｶﾅ)
cHighlight alphanumeric conversion alternative and
press c (Confirm)
Tip
• To enter numbers in Kanji/Kana entry mode
aIn Kanji/Kana entry mode, press a key to which
numbers are assigned
bPress o (EngNumｶﾅ)
cHighlight number conversion alternative and press
c (Confirm)
4-10
Entering Text
4
Symbols, Pictograms, &
Emoticons
AIn a text entry window, press # to
toggle symbols
To toggle double-byte symbols and single-
byte symbols
Press * while Suggestions for double-byte
symbols and single-byte symbols appear
BHighlight target character and press
c
To enter symbols, pictograms, or emoticons
successively
Press w (Continue)
Tip
• To enter symbols, pictograms, or emoticons in
Kanji/Kana entry mode
Enter hiragana like
てん
and press
w
(Convert),
symbols
・
and
…
appear among conversion alternatives.
Similarly, convert
はーと
or
でんわ
to pictograms and
わーい
or
えーん
to emoticons.
4-11
Entering Text
4
Line Breaks
Enter a line break the same way in all text entry
modes.
AIn a text entry window, press *
Quoting Saved Text
Using Phonebook Entries
In a text entry window, use Phonebook via Options to
search saved entries for inserting phone numbers or
mail addresses into message text.
AIn message text, select Options →
Phonebook
BSelect an entry and open details
CHighlight an item and press c
(Select)
SMS Template
In a text entry window, use SMS template via Options
to quote saved text in SMS.
Save frequently used words/phrases as SMS
templates beforehand ( P.4-16).
AIn message text, select Options →
SMS template
BSelect a template
Using Template
In a text entry window, use Templates via Options to
save ".ne.jp" or "http://www" in Phonebook for one
keystroke entry.
AIn message text, select Options →
Templates
BSelect an item
4-12
Entering Text
4
Hangul
Select Hangul entry mode to enter Hangul characters.
AIn a text entry window, press e and
select Hangul
BPress number keys to enter assigned
character units that appear; combine
several consonants and vowels
Editing Text
Deleting
AHighlight character to delete and
press C
When a space is highlighted
The character before cursor is deleted.
To delete all text on/after cursor
Press C for 1+ seconds
To delete all text
Place cursor at the end of text and press C
for 1+ seconds
Consonant Example (Key Assignment)
4 (once) 4 (twice) 4
(three times)
Vowel Example (Key Assignment)
01 (), 2 () 0122
02 (), 1 () 0221
02 (), 3
() 0223
02 (), 3 (), 1 (), 2 (),
1 ()
4-13
Entering Text
4
Copy/Cut, Paste, & Undo
Copy/Cut
Select a range of characters to copy/cut. Paste
copied/cut characters repeatedly to other locations.
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→Copy or Cut
BUse a to highlight the first
character in the range and press
c (Start)
To copy/cut all
Press o (All)
CUse a to specify range and press
c (End)
Paste
AUse a to move cursor to paste
location
BSelect Options →Paste
CSelect an item to paste and press
c (Select)
Tip
• To copy text from Phonebook entries or My
Phonebook Details
Select Options →Copy item ( P.5-14, 5-17)
• When copy/cut items
Up to 10 copied/cut items can be saved. The contents
remains even after turning power off. With 10 items
already saved, oldest items are automatically deleted.
4-14
Entering Text
4
Undo
Undo operations immediately after performing such
as Cut, Paste, or Delete. Alternatively, undo
converting operations immediately after character
conversion; this operation can be performed in Kanji/
Kana entry mode only.
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→Undo
Jump
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→Jump →Top or End
Prediction On/Off
(Japanese Only)
Select to show/hide Japanese kana conversion
alternatives in Suggestions.
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→Prediction On or Prediction Off
Learning On/Off
(Japanese Only)
Select to keep record or not for entered character
strings by Suggestions.
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→Learning On or Learning Off
Tip
• To delete copied/cut items
In Step 3, highlight item to delete, press w (Delete)
and select Yes
.
Default
Setting
■On
Default
Setting
■On
4-15
Entering Text
4
Font Size
Change font size for SMS, S! Mail, or template text;
available sizes vary.
AIn message text, select Options →
Font Size
User Dictionary
(Japanese Only)
Save frequently used words/phrases of up to 20
characters; entries appear in Suggestions when key
characters are entered.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →User dictionary →
New entry
BSelect Word field and enter text
CSelect Reading field and enter key
characters
DPress w (Save)
Default
Setting
■Large
Tip
• To edit User Dictionary entries
aPress c and select Settings →Phone settings →
User dictionary →Edit entry
bSelect contents to edit
cEdit a word or readings and press w (Save)
• To delete one item
aPress c and select Settings →Phone settings →
User dictionary →Edit entry
bHighlight item to delete, select Options →Delete
• To delete all items
aPress c and select Settings →Phone settings →
User dictionary →Delete all
bEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) and
select Yes
4-16
Entering Text
4
Saving to User Dictionary
AIn a text entry window, select Options
→Word registration
BUse a to move cursor to the first
character, press c (Start)
To display User Dictionary window for
checking the saved contents, etc.
Press o (UserDic)
CUse a to set the range, press
c (End)
DSelect Reading field and enter
reading
EPress w (Save)
SMS Templates
Save frequently used words/phrases of up to 70
characters.
APress w ( ) and select Templates
→SMS templates
BSelect Options →Add new
When no SMS templates have been saved
Press w (Add new)
CPress c (Select) and enter text
Tip
• When the range containing line break
Character string before line break is saved as the
dictionary word.
• To edit User dictionary
Press o (UserDic) to select start point for Word
registration; operations in "User Dictionary (Japanese
Only)" ( P.4-15) can be performed. Select Edit entry
and registered entries appear.
4-17
Entering Text
4
DPress w (Save)
Tip
• To use an SMS template ( P.4-11)
• To edit an SMS template
aPress w ( ) and select Templates →SMS
templates
bHighlight an item to edit and press c (Edit)
cPress c (Select) and edit the text
dPress w (Save)
• To delete an SMS template
aPress w ( ) and select Templates →SMS
templates
bHighlight an item to delete, select Options →
Delete →Selected →Yes
To delete all SMS templates, in Step b, select Delete
→All, enter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) and
select Yes. To delete multiple items, select Delete →
Multiple in Step b, check items to delete, press w
(Delete) and select Yes.
4-18
Phonebook
5-2
Phonebook
5
Saving to Phonebook
Phonebook Entry Items
Save phone numbers, mail addresses, and more for
up to 1,000 entries in Phonebook; USIM Card
Phonebook capacity varies by card. Insert USIM
Card into compatible SoftBank handsets to use
USIM Card Phonebook entries.
Each 708SC Phonebook entry contains the items
listed below.
Item Description
Availability
(Quantity)
708SC USIM
Card
Entry
Number a 3-digit number Ye s
(000-999)1
Yes
(000-
0XX)2
Name Single-/double-byte
characters
Yes (Up to
50
characters)
Yes3
Reading Single-byte
characters Yes Yes3
Phone
Icon
Select one of six
icons
Yes
(Six Icons)
No
Phone
Number
Saved with area
code
Yes
(5 of up to
40 digits
each)
Yes23
Email Single-byte
alphanumerics
Yes
(4 of up to
256
characters
each)
Yes3
(1 address)
Email
Icon
Select one of three
icons Yes No
Categor
y
Select one of twenty
categories Yes Yes2
Caller
ID
Select incoming call
image from Data
Folder
Yes No
Item Description
Availability
(Quantity)
708SC USIM
Card
5-3
Phonebook
5
1 Use speed dialing ( P.5-12) to initiate a Voice Call to
phone numbers with memory Nos. 000 to 099 in
Phonebook of handset.
2 The number of items that can be saved varies by the type
of USIM Card.
3 The number of characters that can be saved varies by the
type of USIM Card.
Call
Notice
Select incoming call
ringtone from Data
Folder
Yes No
Message
Notice
Select incoming S!
Mail/SMS ringtone
from Data Folder
Yes No
Blood
Type
Select one of four
blood types Yes No
Birthday Enter the party's
date of birth Yes No
Address
Enter up to 20
single-byte
characters for postal
code and up to 50
for address
Yes No
Hobby Up to 100
characters Yes No
URL Up to 100 single-
byte alphanumerics
Ye s
(2 URLs) No
Item Description
Availability
(Quantity)
708SC USIM
Card
URL
Icon
Select one of three
icons Yes No
Notes Up to 100
characters Yes No
Secret
Mode Select secret setting Yes No
Note
Item Description
Availability
(Quantity)
708SC USIM
Card
5-4
Phonebook
5
Adding Entry Items
708SC assigns lowest available Entry Number; edit
as required.
ASelect Options →Add to →Phone or
USIM
BEnter additional items as required
*Not available in USIM Card Phonebook.
To change Entry number
Highlight Entry number field and enter a
number
To save Name
aSelect Name field
• Protect important information
Phonebook entry information may be altered or
deleted when battery is removed or left uncharged
for an extended period. Accidents or malfunctions
may also affect Phonebook entries. Back-up
Phonebook entry information and store separately.
SoftBank is not be liable for damages resulting lost
information.
Phonebook Details
5-5
Phonebook
5
bEnter a name
To modify Reading Name
aSelect Reading Name field
bEnter a reading name (use katakana to
organize entries in Phonebook list)
To save Phone number
Highlight Phone number field and enter a
number
To set Phone icon
aSelect Phone number field
bSelect an icon
To save Mail address
aSelect Mail address field
bEnter an address
cSelect an icon
To set Category
aSelect Category field
bSelect a Category
To set Caller ID for a Voice Call or Video
Call*
aSelect Caller ID field
bSelect On
cOpen Data Folder to select an image file, etc.
To set Call notice for a Voice Call or Video
Call*
aSelect Call notice field
bSelect On
cOpen Data Folder to select a file
To set S! Mail/SMS Notice*
aSelect Message notice field
bSelect On
cSelect sound
To save Blood type*
aSelect Blood type field
bSelect blood Type
To save Birthday*
Highlight Birthday field and enter a date
5-6
Phonebook
5
To save Address*
aSelect Address field
bEnter a postal code
cSelect Address field and enter an address
dPress w (OK)
To save Hobby*
aSelect Hobby field
bEnter text
To save URL*
aSelect URL field
bEnter a URL
cSelect an icon
To save Memo*
aSelect Notes field
bEnter text
To set Secret Mode*
aSelect Secret Mode field
bSelect On
CPress w (Save)
Tip
• Phone number field characters
Save 0-9, #, *, P (Pause), and + (International Code) in
Phone field. Press * for 1+ seconds to enter P or
press 0 for 1+ seconds to enter +.
• To save after entering a phone number
Alternatively, during a call, select Options →Add to
Phonebook.
aIn Standby, enter a phone number
bSelect Options →Add to Phonebook →Phone or
USIM
cSelect New or Update and select memory location
for saving the information
dSelect the phone icon
ePerform Steps 2 and 3
• Synchronizing Phonebook with Samsung PC Studio
The entries with Secret Mode On cannot be
synchronized regardless of Secret Mode settings
(cannot be back-upped to PC).
The entries with Secret Mode changed from Off to On,
cannot be synchronized and deleted immediately after
the Secret Mode settings has been changed and tried
synchronization.
For more information about Samsung PC Studio, see
the User's guide in the attached CD-ROM.
5-7
Phonebook
5
Saving from Call Log Records
Save numbers from Call Log records to new or
existing Phonebook entries.
APress r
BUse s to open a Call Log, highlight
a record, select Options →Add to
Phonebook →Phone or USIM
CSelect Phonebook entry type
To create a new entry
Select New
To save to an existing entry
aSelect Update
bOpen the Phonebook entry ( P.5-9)
DSelect a phone icon
EEnter additional items as required
FPress w (Save)
Category Settings
Organize Phonebook entries among twenty
Categories.
New Category (USIM Card)
APress c and select Phonebook
BSelect Options →View from USIM
CPress w (Search) and select Category
search
DSelect Options →New category
EEnter a name
5-8
Phonebook
5
Edit Category
Customize Category names, add Category image/
ringtones to appear and sound for incoming calls/
messages from Category members.
APress c and select Phonebook
To select a USIM Card Category
After Step 1, select Options →View from USIM
BPress w (Search) and select Category
search
CHighlight category to change, select
Options →Category settings
DEdit Category items
To change Category name
Select Category name field and enter a name
To set Category image
Select Category image field then select a file
from Data Folder
To set incoming call ringtone
Select Call notice field then select a file from
Data Folder
To set incoming S! Mail/SMS notice
Select Message notice field then select a
ringtone
To restore Category defaults
Highlight item to restore and press o (Reset)
EPress w (Save)
Tip
• Incoming image & ringtone priority
Images and ringtones set for individual Phonebook
entries take priority over those set for a Category.
5-9
Phonebook
5
Add Member
APress c and select Phonebook
To select Category on USIM Card
After Step 1, select Options →View from USIM
BPress wSearch and select Category
search
CSelect Category to which to add
member
DSelect Options →Add member
ECheck the member to add and press
w (Add)
Using Phonebook
Calling from Phonebook
Phonebook Search
APress d
If the correct search method appears first
Proceed to Step 2, Part b
To change method from an active search
window
Press c and proceed to Step 2
Tip
• To delete a member from a Category
Deleting a member from a Category does not affect
member's Phonebook entry.
aPerform Steps 1 and 2 in "Add Member"
bSelect Category from which to delete member
cHighlight member to delete, select Options →
Remove →Yes
5-10
Phonebook
5
BPress w (Search)
To search Phonebook list
aSelect Phonebook list
bUse s to navigate Phonebook list
To search by Category
aSelect Category search
bSelect Category
To search by name
aSelect Name search
bEnter any part of Name
To search by Reading
aSelect Reading search
bEnter any part of Reading
To search by Entry Number
aSelect Entry No. search
bEnter Entry Number
To search by Phone Number
aSelect Phone No. search
bEnter any part of a phone number
To search by Mail Address
aSelect Email search
bEnter any part of an mail address
CSelect an entry
To open Entry details
Press c (Details/Select)
Tip
• To set Phonebook appearance preference
(Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook)
aPress c and select Settings →Phonebook
settings →View phonebook from
bSelect Phone memory or USIM memory and press
c (Save)
• While Secret Mode is set to Hide
Phonebook Secret Mode is set to On, these Phonebook
entries do not appear. To search these entries, set Secret
Mode to Show.
5-11
Phonebook
5
Initiating a Call
ASelect an entry, press c (Details) to
view Details window
BSelect a number and initiate a call
To initiate a Voice Call
Press c or select Options →Voice call
To initiate a Video Call
Select Options →Video call
Calling from Simple Search and search result
When Simple search is set to On ( P.15-7), enter
numbers to search and display entry name/phone
number; this search for entries starting with Reading
name corresponding to the entered number. Highlight a
phone number, press t or c (Select) →c (Call)
to initiate a Voice Call; select Options →Video call to
call a Video Call.
Entry Details
Tip
• To place a call from Phonebook list
Highlight an entry, select Options →Voice call or
Video call. When entry contains multiple numbers,
Default Number is dialed if set; otherwise, first number
listed is dialed. If Default Number is Not assigned, Call
window appears; select a number.
5-12
Phonebook
5
Calling from phone number search and search
result
Enter 4-digit number to search and display entry name/
phone number; this search for entries contains the
entered number at the first/last part of the entry. When
Simple search is set to On and any entry searched, press
s to switch the search result between phone number
search and Simple search. Highlight a phone number,
press t or c (Select ) →c (Call) to initiate a
Voice Call; select Options →Video call to call a Video
Call.
Calling USIM Card Phonebook
Entries
Use Entry Numbers as shortcuts to call numbers
saved in the first 100 USIM Card Phonebook entries.
AEnter the last two digits of an Entry
Number
BPress #
If the correct entry is not highlighted
Use j to highlight it
CPress w (Call)
To initiate a Video Call
Press o (V-Call)
Change Search Method
Set to display specified search window when pressed
d in Standby.
APress c and select Settings →
Phonebook settings →Search type
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■Phonebook list
Tip
• The contents of search method settings are:
Phonebook list: Press d in Standby, shows list
window.
Other settings: Set each search type window appears.
5-13
Phonebook
5
Speed Dialing
Enter the last two digits of an Entry Number to call
the Voice Call Default Number in Phonebook entries
000 - 099.
AEnter the last two digits of an Entry
Number
BPress c ()
Phonebook Options
Use the following options in Phonebook List or
Entry details.
Tip
• When Simple search is set to On
Enter number to show Simple search result (entry
names and phone numbers) appears. After 5 seconds,
Simple search result disappears. appeared (Center
Key area) enables Speed dialing.
Note
• Speed Dialing is invalid for an entry if Voice Call
Default Number ( P.5-14) is set to Not assigned.
• While Secret Mode is set to Hide and Phonebook
Secret Mode is set to On; these Phonebook entry
numbers cannot be used for Speed Dialing.
Item Description
Add to1Start the process of saving a new
entry.
Voice call
Initiate a Voice Call to the
highlighted number or Default
Number ( P.5-10).
Video call
Initiate a Video Call to the
highlighted number or Default
Number ( P.5-10).
5-14
Phonebook
5
1 This item does not appear in Entry details.
2 This item does not appear in Phonebook list.
Editing Phonebook
Entries
To search, list or Entry details, see "Phonebook
Search" ( P.5-9).
Create message
Open a new message addressed to
the number saved as an entry
( P.17-6).
Send
Send entry as a vFile; select Via
message, to open a new message
with entry attached ( P.17-6), or
Via bluetooth, to send entry to
another device wirelessly ( P.12-
6).
Delete Delete an entry ( P.5-15).
Save to Data
Folder
Create a vFile and save it to Other
documents in Data Folder.
Copy to USIM/
Copy to phone ( P.5-15)
View from
USIM/View
from Phone1
Toggle between Phonebook and
USIM Phonebook.
International
dial
Add international code and country
code to the number ( P.2-2).
Item Description
Hide/Show my
ID
Initiate a Voice/Video Call with
your number Shown/Hidden. Select
None to follow Caller ID settings.
Select Show my ID to show your
number. Select Hide my ID to hide
your number.
Print via
Bluetooth
Print highlighted Entry details
(name, phone number information)
using the printer via Bluetooth®
connection.
Memory status1Check memory usage.
Copy item2Copy highlighted entry item.
Mark default
number2( P.5-14)
Item Description
5-15
Phonebook
5
When editing Phonebook entries with Phonebook
Secret Mode On, set Secret Mode to Show.
Edit
AOpen Entry details
BPress w (Edit)
CEdit entry items and press w (Save)
Default Number
When a Phonebook entry contains multiple phone
numbers/mail addresses, set calling/messaging
priorities by assigning to Default Number.
Resetting an item changes it to Not assigned.
AOpen Entry details
BSelect Options →Mark default
number
CSet or reset options
To se t
aSelect Voice call,Video call, or Message
bSelect a phone number or mail address
Default
Setting
■Voice call: First phone number
■Video call: First phone number
■Message: Not assigned
5-16
Phonebook
5
To reset
Highlight Voice call,Video call, or Message
and press o (Reset)
DPress w (Save)
Copy to USIM/Copy to Phone
AHighlight entry or open Entry details
BCopy the entry
To copy from Phonebook to USIM Card
Phonebook
Select Options →Copy to USIM →Selected or
All →Yes
To copy from USIM Card Phonebook to
Phonebook
Select Options →Copy to phone →Selected or
All
Deleting Entries
Deleting a Single Entry
AHighlight entry or open Entry details
BSelect Options →Delete →Selected
→Yes
Deleting Multiple Entries at Once
AHighlight entries
To select Phonebook or USIM Card
Phonebook
Select Options →View from Phone or View
from USIM
BSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
CCheck an entry to delete
5-17
Phonebook
5
DRepeat Step 3 to check all target
entries
EPress w (Delete) and proceed to
Step 7 when all are not checked
FEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm)
GSelect Yes
Deleting All Entries at Once
Delete all Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook
entries.
AHighlight entries
To move between Phonebook and USIM
Card Phonebook
Select Options →View from USIM or View
from Phone
BSelect Options →Delete →All
CEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) →Yes
My Phonebook Details
Confirm handset phone number. Add your name,
mail address, street address, and other information.
APress c and Press 0
To enter or edit other items
aPress w (Edit)
bEnter or edit items following the same
procedures for Phonebook items; when
finished, then press w (Save)
5-18
Phonebook
5
Options
Item Description
Send my
phonebook
details
Send as a vFile; select Via message
to create a message with vFile
attached ( P.17-6), or Via
Bluetooth to send vFile wirelessly
( P.12-6).
Delete Delete owner info except numbers
on USIM Card.
Save to Data
Folder
Create a vFile and save it to Other
documents in Data Folder.
Copy item Copy highlighted entry item.
Print via
Bluetooth
Print My phonebook details (name,
phone number information) using
the printer via Bluetooth®
connection.
5-19
5-20
Phonebook
5
Video Call
6-2
Video Call
6
Before Using Video Calls
Exchange voice and video via Video Call-compatible
3G handsets.
You may choose not to send your own image ( P.6-
6).
Video Call Precautions
• Calls to incompatible handsets may be disconnected;
charges apply.
• It may be difficult to use Speaker Phone with earpiece
volume raised; lower volume or use Stereo Earphone
Microphone.
• Ambient noise may hamper voice quality; use Stereo
Earphone Microphone.
• Using Speaker Phone in public may disturb other;
please mind your manners.
Initiating a Video Call
Dial directly or from Phonebook entries or Call Log
records.
AEnter a phone number
BSelect Options →Video call
CPress y to end the call
When Video Call cannot be connected
Unavailable for a video call... appears; select Options
→Voice call or Create message to contact the recipient,
or View contact details to open Phonebook. Select Add
to Phonebook to save the receiver's number to
Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook.
Initiating a Call ( P.2-3)
Receiving a Video Call
AWhen 708SC rings/vibrates, press
c (Accept)
Loudspeaker on? appears;
Tip
• Engaged Video Call Operations ( P.6-3)
6-3
Video Call
6
Select Yes or No
Allow own picture to be shown? appears;
Select Yes or No
BPress y to end the call
Tip
• To adjust ringtone volume
While 708SC is ringing, press n or b.
• When a Stereo Earphone Microphone is connected
Press Stereo Earphone Microphone switch for 1+
seconds to answer video calls. Press for 1+ seconds to
end a Video Call.
• To disconnect a Video Call without answering it
Press o (Busy)
• To change or cancel outgoing image
Set 708SC to send Substitute Image beforehand ( P.6-
6).
Alternatively, change to Substitute Image during a call
( P.6-6).
• Send Your Image or Substitute Image during a
Video Call
After Step 1, Your Image appears. When confirmation
appears, select Yes or No to send Your Image or
Substitute Image. When Video Call connects Your
Image or Substitute Image appears.
• Engaged Video Call Operations ( P.6-5)
6-4
Video Call
6
Engaged Video Call
Operations
Perform operations from Video Call Menu or
Options.
aLarge Display (Normally, the other party's image)
bSmall Display (Normally, your image)
cThe other party's name or phone number
dCall duration
eMeaning of the icon at cursor position
fVideo Call Menu Icons
/ : Toggle Speaker Phone Off/On
: Toggle Incoming Image Size
/ : Freeze or unfreeze outgoing image
(Blue)/ (Gray): Toggle Your Image and
Substitute Image
/ : Freeze or unfreeze incoming image
: Flip image
ADuring Video Calls, select Video Call
Menu or Options to adjust Video Call
settings
To toggle Speaker Phone off/on
Highlight / and press c
To select incoming image size
Highlight and press c to select an item
To freeze or unfreeze outgoing image
Highlight / and press c
To toggle Your Image and Substitute Image
Highlight (Blue/Gray) and press c
To freeze or unfreeze incoming image
Highlight / and press c
相田名都
￥ １４４ ００：００：００
終了
オフ゜ション
c
b
f
a
d
e
6-5
Video Call
6
To flip outgoing image
Highlight and press c
To cancel Your Image/mic/key tones
aSelect Options →Mute
bCheck item(s) to cancel and press w (Save)
When Camera (Your Image) is canceled,
Substitute Image is sent.
To adjust outgoing image appearance/quality
aSelect Options →Display options →Effects
or Quality
bHighlight an item and press c
To adjust outgoing image brightness
aSelect Options →Display options →
Brightness
bUse s to adjust brightness
Engaged Video Call Options
Tip
• To adjust earpiece volume
Press j during a Video Call.
• To enlarge or reduce outgoing image
Press n or b during a Video Call.
• When outgoing image is canceled
708SC send caller Substitute Image.
Item Description
Normal/Speaker on Toggle Speaker Phone off/on
( P.6-4).
Mute Cancel sending outgoing image/
mic/key tones ( P.6-4).
Display options Adjust outgoing image
appearance/quality ( P.6-4).
Settings Select Video Call settings ( P.6-
5).
Phonebook Open Phonebook Search
window.
6-6
Video Call
6Video Call Settings
Sending Your Image
When Always ask is set, Choose between Your Image
or Substitute Image as outgoing image each time a
Video Call is received.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Video call →Show my
picture
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Selecting a Substitute Image
Select an image to use as the outgoing image (in
place of Your Image).
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Video call →Select still
picture
BPress c (Change)
COpen Data Folder, select a file and
press c (Save)
Add to Phonebook
Save number to Phonebook or
USIM Card Phonebook ( P.5-
7).
Send DTMF Send push tones.
Memo Create and save text memos
( P.14-10).
Details Open Phonebook Entry details.
Switch to headset/
Switch to phone
Appears when Bluetooth®-
compatible headset is in use.
Select headset or phone
(handset).
Default
Setting
■Always ask
Item Description
Default
Setting
■Camera Off
6-7
Video Call
6
Retry Settings
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings→Video call →Retry with
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Voi ce Mu te
Set Voice mute to On to answer Video Calls with no
sound sending to caller.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Video call →Voice mute
BSelect On and press c (Save)
Tip
• To restore Substitute Image to its default
aPerform Steps 1 and 2
bSelect any image file in Data Folder →Options →
Reset
Default
Setting
■Always ask
Tip
• The contents of Retry with are:
Always ask: Select an action from Options.
Voice call: Choose whether or not to redial number as a
Vo i c e C a l l .
Messages: Choose whether or not to create a message.
None: Return to Standby after a failed Video Call.
Automatic retry option changes by the setting.
Default
Setting
■Off
6-8
Video Call
6
Tip
• To send sound
aDuring a Video Call, select Options →Mute
bUncheck Voice
cPress w (Save)
6-9
Mobile Camera
7-2
Mobile Camera
7
Before Using Mobile
Camera
Capture still images in JPEG format or video in 3GP
format.
Mobile Camera Precautions
• Use a dry soft cloth to remove debris from camera
lens.
• Avoid camera shake; hold 708SC steady or place it
on a stable surface and use Timer.
• Mobile Camera employs high precision
technology, however, some pixels may seem
brighter or darker than others.
• Leaving 708SC in a hot place for an extended
period before image capture/save may affect image
quality.
• Exposing camera lens to direct sunlight may affect
color filter.
708SC Camera
708SC has rotating camera. Capture still images/
videos with rotating Camera lens inwards/outwards
to suit various situations. Images/videos may appear
upside down on Display by Camera lens direction.
Use n to display images/videos in the normal
position.
Lens inwards
Lens outwards
7-3
Mobile Camera
7
Using Display as Viewfinder
aSize
, , , ,
, , ,
bQuality
: Superfine : Fine
: Normal : Low
: Economy
cWhite Balance
: Auto : Fine : Cloudy
: Incandescent : Fluorescent
dMode
No display : Single shot
: Multi-shot (6 shots) : Multi-shot (9 shots)
: Multi-shot (15 shots)
: Mosaic shot (2 x 2) : Mosaic shot (3 x 3)
eTimer (When set)
: 3 seconds
: 5 seconds
: 10 seconds
fDisplay Position (Top & Bottom)
: Normal display when lens outwards
: Normal display when lens inwards
gDisplay Position (Left & Right)
: Normal image
: Mirror image
hAudio Recording
: On : Off
iRecording Time
: Limit for S! Mail : 10 seconds
: 30 seconds : Normal recording
Camera Viewfinder Video Viewfinder
e
d
f
g
abc
abchi
jk
l
7-4
Mobile Camera
7
jElapsed Recording Time
kTotal Data Size/Recording Time
lProgress Bar
Capturing a Still Image
Camera Mode
Select Single shot to capture single images, Multishot
or Mosaic shot to capture multiple images. Save
images in Pictures.
Mode Description Image size
Single shot
Capture single images, select
size for purpose; attach
images to S! Mail, save as
Wallpaper, etc.
1600 x 1200
1280 x 960
640 x 480
320 x 240
240 x 320
240 x 192
Multi-shot Press shutter once to capture
6, 9 or 15 sequential images. 320 x 240
Mosaic shot
Capture multiple images, one
at a time; 708SC
automatically combines
single images (4 for
2x 2 or 9 for 3x 3) into one
composite image.
240 x 192
Tip
• When using Single shot mode with a flame
Image size is automatically adjusted to 240 x 192.
Mode Description Image size
7-5
Mobile Camera
7
Capturing Still Images
Single Shot
APress e
In Video mode
Press w (Photos) to change to Camera mode
BSelect Options →Shooting mode →
Single shot →Take & save
To save captured images without review
Select Automatic save
CSelect Options and perform other
actions as required ( P.7-6)
DPreview image on Display
Zoom image preview in/out (invalid for 1600
x 1200)
Use u or d to zoom out or in
Adjust brightness
Use r or l to lighten or darken image
EPress c (Take)
To cancel the image and capture another
Press w (Back)
Tip
• To activate/adjust Timer in image preview
Press
5
to toggle
3 seconds
,
5 seconds
,
10 seconds
,
and
Off
.
• To adjust viewfinder in image preview
Press # to toggle Full screen,Actual ratio,Full
screen without indicator, and Full screen with grid.
• To send an image via S! Mail or Bluetooth®
aAfter Step 5, press c (Send) and select send
medium
bSend image ( P.12-6, 17-6)
7-6
Mobile Camera
7
Preview Options
Available options may vary by mode and other settings.
Review Options
Item Description
Shooting mode
Select Shooting mode and save
setting for Single shot, or image
count for Multi-shot or Mosaic shot
( P.7-5, 7-9).
Effects
Select Black & White,Sepia or
Negative effects filters. When an
effect is active, select None to
cancel.
Frames Add a frame to image in Single shot
mode.
Timer Activate self-timer ( P.7-5).
Go to photos Open Pictures folder.
Camera settings Select image size, image quality,
etc. ( P.7-13).
Camera
shortcuts
Open a function shortcuts graphic
( P.7-10).
Item Description
Delete Delete the last image captured.
Set as
Set image for Wallpaper,
Phonebook entries, or Substitute
Image.
Edit photo Edit an image in Pictures folder
( P.7-15).
Dynamic Effect Create Flash images using Still
images ( P.7-19).
Rename Change file name.
mPostcard Create a mobile postcard ( P.7-7).
Go to photos Open Pictures folder.
Lock/Unlock Set/release file protection.
Details Confirm file size or format.
7-7
Mobile Camera
7
Mobile Postcard
Use Single shot,Multi-shot, or Mosaic shot images.
This function renders one of two images as line art,
merging it with the other to create a stamped
photograph.
ACapture an image ( P.7-5, 7-8)
BSelect Options →mPostcard
CPress c (Add)
DAdd a second image
To select a still image from Data Folder
aSelect Open
bOpen Data Folder and select an image file
To capture an image
aSelect Take photo
bPress c (Take)
cPress c (Add)
EPress c (Merge) and check the
merged result
To change image
aPress C
bHighlight image to change, select Options →
Change image
cRepeat Steps 4 and 5
To swap image positions
aPress C
bSelect Options →Swap image
cPerform Step 5
FTo edit line art, press o (Edit)
To change line art position
aSelect Options →Move
bUse a to move image and press w
(Done)
To change line art size
aSelect Options →Size
7-8
Mobile Camera
7
bUse j to adjust image and press w
(Done)
To rotate line art
aSelect Options →Rotate
bUse s to rotate image and press w
(Done)
To change line art color
aSelect Options →Change colour
bUse s to select color and press w (Done)
To adjust line art shadow
aSelect Options →Shadow on or Shadow off
bPress w (Done)
GPress w (Save) and enter a file
name
To save and send image
aPress c (S & S)
bSelect medium and send ( P.12-6, 17-6)
Multi Shot
APress e
In Video mode
Press w (Photos) to change Camera mode
BSelect Options →Shooting mode →
Multi-shot and select the number of
images to capture
CSelect Options and perform other
actions as required ( P.7-6)
DPreview image on Display
Zoom in/out
Use u or d to enlarge or reduce image
Adjust brightness
Use r or l to lighten or darken image
EPress c (Take)
7-9
Mobile Camera
7
FView captured still image(s)
To view still images individually
aHighlight the image and press c (View)
bPress C
To retake a still image
Press w (Back)
Mosaic Shot
APress e
In Video mode
Press w (Photos) to change Camera mode
BSelect Options →Shooting mode →
Mosaic shot to select the number of
images to capture
CSelect Options and perform other
actions as required ( P.7-6)
DPreview image on Display
Zoom in/out
Use u or d to zoom in or out
Adjust brightness
Use r or l to brighten or darken image
EPress c (Take) for each image
FView captured still images
To retake an image
Press w (Back)
Mosaic Mode (2 x 2)
7-10
Mobile Camera
7
Shortcut Key Operations
Change the settings by pressing the key assigned to
each item.
Available shortcuts vary by mode or setting status.
Capturing Video
Video Mode
Capture videos suitable for attaching to mail or
saving as a record.
Alternatively, capture videos without sound.
Captured video is saved in 3GP format to the Videos
folder of Data Folder.
Key Item Description
1Size
1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960,
640 x 480, 320 x 240,
240 x 320, 240 x 192
2Quality Superfine, Fine, Normal,
Low, Economy
3Shooting
mode
Single shot, Multi-shot (6, 9,
15 shots), Mosaic shot (2 x 2,
3 x 3)
4White balance Auto, Fine, Cloudy,
Incandescent, Fluorescent
5Timer 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10
seconds
6Frames Select from 9 types
7Effects Black & White, Sepia,
Negative
0Photo album -
#Screen mode
Toggle Full screen, Actual
ratio, Full screen without
indicator, Full screen with
grid
wMode switch -
nVe rt i ca l
inverse -
bHorizontal
inverse -
jZoom -
sBrightness -
Key Item Description
7-11
Mobile Camera
7
Capturing Video
APress e
In Camera mode
Press w (Videos) to open Video mode
BSelect Options and perform other
actions as required ( P.7-11)
CPreview image on Display
Zoom in/out
Use u or d to enlarge or reduce image
Adjust brightness
Use r or l to lighten or darken image
DPress c (Record)
EPress c (Save) and end
After recording time elapses
Capturing automatically ends and captured
video is saved automatically.
FPress c (Play) to view captured
video
To continue capturing
Press w (Back)
Preview Options
Tip
• To activate/adjust Timer when capturing
In image preview, press
5
to toggle
3 seconds
,
5
seconds
,
10 seconds
,
Off
.
Item Description
Effects
Select Black & White,Sepia, or
Negative effects filters. When an
effect is active, select None to
cancel.
Timer Activate self-timer ( P.7-11).
Go to videos Open Videos folder.
Video settings Select image size, image quality,
etc. ( P.7-14).
Camcorder
shortcuts
Open a function shortcuts graphic
( P.7-12).
7-12
Mobile Camera
7
Review Options
Shortcut Key Operations
Change the settings by pressing the key assigned to
each item.
Item Description
Edit Edit Video files in Data Folder (P.7-
17).
Resolution Select video display size while
playing or paused.
Send Send file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
Set as Set captured videos as Voice
ringtone or Video ringtone.
Delete Delete the last video captured.
Rename Change file name.
Go to videos Open Videos folder.
Lock/Unlock Set/release file protection.
Details Confirm file size or format.
Key Item Description
1Size 320 x 240, 176 x 144,
128 x 96
2Quality Fine, Normal, Low,
Economy
3Shooting time
Limit for S! Mail, 10
seconds, 30 seconds,
Normal recording
4White balance Auto, Fine, Cloudy,
Incandescent, Fluorescent
5Timer 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10
seconds
6Audio
recording On, Off
7Effects Black & White, Sepia,
Negative
0Record album -
wMode switch -
nVertical
inverse -
bHorizontal
inverse -
jZoom -
sBrightness -
Key Item Description
7-13
Mobile Camera
7
Mobile Camera Settings
Make settings related to image capturing including
the size, image quality, save location, etc. of images.
Camera Settings
APress e
In Video mode
Press w (Photos) to change to Camera mode
BSelect Options →Camera settings
CSelect an item and perform
operations to set
To set image size
aSelect Size
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set image quality
aSelect Quality
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set Viewfinder
aSelect Viewfinder
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set the shutter sound
aSelect Shutter sound
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set sequential shot speed
aSelect Multi-shot speed
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set the Single shot mode
aSelect Single shot mode
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■ Size: 240 x 320 ■ Quality: Normal
■ Viewfinder: Full screen
■ Shutter sound: Shutter 1
■ Multi-shot speed: High
■ Single shot mode: Take & save
■ White balance: Auto
■ Default name: Photo
7-14
Mobile Camera
7
To set white balance
aSelect White balance
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set file name
aSelect Default name
bEnter file name
Video Settings
APress e
In Camera mode
Press w (Videos) to change to Video mode
BSelect Options →Video settings
CSelect an item and adjust settings
To set duration
aSelect Recording time
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set size
aSelect Size
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set image quality
aSelect Quality
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set voice recording
aSelect Audio recording
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set file name
aSelect Default name
bEnter file name
Default
Setting
■ Recording time: Limit for S! Mail
■ Size: 176 x 144
■ Quality: Economy ■ Audio recording:
On
■ Default name: Video
7-15
Mobile Camera
7
Viewing Images
View images/video clips saved in Data Folder.
Viewing Still Images
APress e
In Video mode
Press w (Photos) to change Camera mode
BSelect Options →Go to photos
CHighlight a file and press c (View)
Viewing Videos
APress e
In Camera mode
Press w (Videos) to change to Video mode
BSelect Options →Go to videos
CHighlight and select a file and press
c (Play)
Editing Still Images
Edit image files saved in Data Folder.
APress c, select Data folder and
select an image to edit
BHighlight a file and press c (View)
CPress c (Edit)
Tip
• Video recording time
When the recording time is set to
Normal recording
,
video with maximum of approximately one hour can be
recorded in ordinary mode.
• When Recording time is set to Limit for S! Mail
Unable to set
Size with 320
x
240
; Quality is
automatically set to
Economy
, and cannot be changed.
7-16
Mobile Camera
7
DEdit using Options
To change the size of an image
aSelect Resize
bSelect the setting
cEnter Width or Height (If Customise is
selected)
dPress w (Done)
To add effects to an image
aSelect Effects
bSelect the setting
cPress w (Done)
To add blur or correct red-eye
aSelect Partial effects →Partial blur or
Redeye repair
bSelect Options and select the suitable
operation
cPress w (Done)
To adjust an image
aSelect Adjust →Brightness/Contrast/Colour
bAdjust the image
cPress w (Done)
To add a frame
aSelect Frames
bUse s to select a frame
cPress w (Done)
To add clip art to an image
aSelect Cliparts
bSelect a piece of clip art to add to an image
cSelect Options →Size and use j to adjust
the clip art size
dSelect Options →Rotate and use s to turn
the clip art
eSelect Options →Move and use a to move
the clip art
fPress w (Done)
To add text to image (320 x 240 or above)
aSelect Insert text
bEnter text
7-17
Mobile Camera
7
cSelect Options →Size and use j to adjust
the text size
dSelect Options →Rotate and use s to turn
the text
eSelect Options →Font size →Large/
Normal/Small
fSelect Options →Colour and use a to
adjust the text color
gPress w (Done)
To rotate image
aSelect Rotate
bSelect 90° R or 90° L
cPress w (Done)
To fl ip i m a g e
aSelect Flip
bSelect Vertically or Horizontally
cPress w (Done)
To crop image
aSelect Crop
bSelect Options →Size and use j to adjust
the trimming size
cSelect Options →Shape and use s to
select the trimming shape
dSelect Options →Move and use a to
adjust the trimming position
eSelect Options →Crop
fPress w (Done)
EPress c (Save)
FEnter a name for the image
Editing Videos
Edit Video files in Data Folder.
APress c, and select Data Folder →
Videos
BHighlight a file, select Options →Edit
CEdit using Options
7-18
Mobile Camera
7
To cut video
aSelect Cut
bPress c (Play)
cPress w (Start) at the start point
dPress w (End) at the End point
eTo cancel and retry, press o (Reset) and
repeat b to d
fPress w (Done)
To merge multiple videos
aSelect Merge
bCheck files to merge (Up to ten files)
cRepeat b to check all target files
dPress w (Done)
ePress c (Merge)
To replace sound from other video/sound
aSelect Replace sound →From other video or
From other sound
bPress c (Open)
cSelect a file and press w (Done)
DPress c (Save)
EEnter a file name
Tip
• To confirm video before editing
Press
w
(Preview)
• To add files to merge videos
aAfter e in Step 3 in "To merge multiple videos,"
select Options →Add
bPerform b to e in Step 3 in "To merge multiple
videos"
• To delete the file order for merging
aAfter e in Step 3 in "To merge multiple videos,"
use s to highlight the file to delete
bSelect Options →Delete →Yes
• To change the file order for merging
aAfter e in Step 3 in "To merge multiple videos,"
use s to highlight the file to move
bSelect Options →Change order
cUse s to highlight a personal folder or a file,
highlight the file and press c
7-19
Mobile Camera
7
Create Flash®
Create Flash® images using still images saved in
Pictures folder, already created Flash® images saved
in Other documents folder, or still images previewed
immediately after shooting; newly created Flash®
images are saved to Other documents folder in Data
Folder.
APress c and Camera →Dynamic
effect list
BSelect files
CPerform creation operations
To add frame to image
aSelect (Frame)
bSelect the frame
To add icon to image
aSelect (Icon)
bSelect the icon
cSelect Options →Size, use j to adjust the
size and press w (Done)
dSelect Options →Rotate and use s to
adjust the angle as required
eUse a to adjust the position and w
(Done)
fRepeat a to e to add more icons
To add text to image
aSelect (Text)
bEnter text
cSelect Options →Font size and adjust the
size as required, and press w (Done)
dSelect Options →Font color and use s to
adjust the color as required, and press w
(Done)
eUse a to adjust the position and w
(Done)
fUse s to change scroll direction and press
w (Done)
7-20
Mobile Camera
7
gTo add more text, select (Text), press
c (Insert) and repeat b to g
To add watch on image
aSelect (Watch)
bSelect the watch
cPress w (Done)
To reset image during editing
aSelect (Reset)
bSelect Yes
DPress w (Save)
EEnter an image name
Tip
• To delete added frame/watch
aAfter Step 2, select (Frame) or (Watch)
bPress w (Delete)
• To delete added icon(s)/text(s)
aAfter Step 2, select (Icon) or (Text)
bUse s to highlight more icons/texts to delete
cPress w (Delete)
dPress c (Done)
• Available icon/text to add
Up to 5 icons/texts can be added.
7-21
Mobile Camera
7
Attaching Images to a
Message
Attach captured image or recorded video and send
via S! Mail.
AAfter capturing, press c (Send) →
As message
To send video
In image review, select Options →Send →As
message
BEnter an address, subject, text, etc.,
and send
• To create Flash® images using images already saved
in Data Folder
aHighlight image saved in Data Folder and select
Options →Dynamic Effect
bPerform Steps 1 to 3 ( P.7-19) in "Create Flash®"
Note
• Created Flash® images cannot be sent as message.
Tip
• To send a still image or video via Bluetooth®
Select Via bluetooth in Step 1 ( P.12-6).
7-22
Display Settings
8-2
Display Settings
8
Standby Display Settings
Wallpaper
Set Pictures that displays the saved still images or
animations, or Photo slide that displays still images
one by one, or mPet world image. Set to hide still
image.
A
Press
c
and select
Settings
→
Display settings
→
Wallpaper
BPerform operations to set
To change settings
Select Pictures,Photo slide,mPet world image,
or None
To change the image of Pictures
aHighlight Pictures and press w (Edit)
bSelect the save location of files and select a
file
cPress c (Set)
Default
Setting
■Pictures
8-3
Display Settings
8
To set/edit the image of Photo slide
aSelect Photo slide and press w (Edit)
bPerform Steps 2 to 4 in "Setting Photo Slide"
( P.8-2) or perform Steps 2 and 3 in "Editing
Photo Slide" ( P.8-3)
CPress c (Save)
Photo Slide
APress c and select Tools →Photo
slide
BPress c (Add)
CSelect save location for the file, check
the image to set and press w (Done)
To see preview
aPress w (Preview) and select Yes
(Cropping the left and the right) or No
(Displaying in the original horizontal and
vertical ratio)
bPress C to close the preview
To set effect
aUse j to highlight Effect field
bUse s to toggle setting
To change the switching duration per still
image
aUse j to highlight Duration field
bUse s to highlight Effect field
DPress c (Set) and select Yes (crop
sides) or No (show full image)
Tip
• After setting mPet
mPet operations are enabled ( P.24-5). Press y to
show Standby as usual; various operations can be
performed.
Note
• With no pet selected in mPet,mPet world image
cannot be set as Wallpaper.
8-4
Display Settings
8
Editing Photo Slide
APress c and select Tools →Photo
slide
BPerform editing operations
To edit still images
aSelect Options →Replace
bCheck a still image to set and press w
(Done)
To change order of still images
aHighlight the still images to change order,
select Options →Change Order
bUse a to change order and press c
(Save)
To delete a still image
Highlight the still image to delete, select
Options →Delete →Yes
To add a still image
aHighlight any part where a still image is not
set and press o (Add)
bCheck a still image to add and press w
(Done)
CPress c (Set) and select Yes or No
Clock Display
Tip
• To adjust slide size
To display large in the window, select Yes in Step 4. To
display in the original horizontal and vertical ratio,
select No.
Tip
• To adjust slide size
To display large in the window, select Yes in Step 3. To
display in the original horizontal and vertical ratio,
select No.
Default
Setting
■Off
8-5
Display Settings
8
In Standby, select Digital clock, Dual clock, and
Calendar to display. In Standby, hiding clock is also
available.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Clock display
BSelect settings
Digital clock
aSelect Digital clock
bPress w (Edit) and use s to select clock
type
cPress c
Dual clock
aSelect Dual clock
bPress w (Edit)
cPerform Step 3 in "Changing Home Time
Zone" ( P.1-22)
To display calendar
Select Calendar
To hide clock
Select Off
CPress c (Save)
8-6
Display Settings
8
Operator Name
In Standby, show or hide operator name.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Operator name
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Menu Display
Menu Style
Change Display type of menu list (Except Yahoo!
Keitai menu).
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Main menu style
BPerform operations to set
To se t Bicycle
aSelect Bicycle
bUse s to change the type
cPress d and Use s to change seasons
To se t Amoeba or Slider
aSelect Amoeba or Slider
bUse s to change the type
Tip
• When Dual clock is set
In Standby, two types of clock appear. Upper clock
indicates time of the district set by "Changing Home
Time Zone" ( P.1-22). Bottom clock indicates time of
the district set by "Dual clock."
Default
Setting
■Off
Default
Setting
■Black
8-7
Display Settings
8
To set Black
Proceed to Step 4
CPress c
DPress w (Save)
Popup Menu
Set whether to display minor items in balloon when
highlighting a medium item of a menu.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Popup menu
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
List Font Size
Set main menu item font size.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →List font size
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■Off
Tip
• When you highlight a middle item that has no small
item
Menu balloons are not displayed. They are not
displayed in Alarms in Tool Menu either.
Default
Setting
■ Large
8-8
Display Settings
8
Zoom List
Set whether to enlarge highlighted item of a menu in
selection display.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Zoom list
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Backlight Brightness &
Duration
Adjusting Display Brightness
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Brightness
BUse a to adjust brightness and
press c (Save)
Backlight Duration
Set Display backlight lighting time and make display
settings. Display becomes dimmer when the time set
in On has elapsed and Display goes off when the
time set in Dim has elapsed.
Default
Setting
■Off
Tip
• Applicable range of the zoom list setting
Zoom list setting is applied to the third layer menu and
lower. For example, in a case you select Settings →
Call settings →Voice call →Diverts, the menu Voice
call and lower menus are zoomed.
Default
Setting
■On: 15 seconds ■Dim: 5 seconds
8-9
Display Settings
8
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Backlight time
BSelect an item and make settings
To set the time to light brightly
aSelect On field
bSelect the time to set and press c
To set the time till Display goes off
aSelect Dim field
bSelect the time to set and press c
CPress w (Save)
Sub LCD Light
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Sub LCD light
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Dialing Display
Change Display to appear when dialing in Standby
mode. When character type is set to either Normal or
Serif, alternatively, change the font size, color, and/or
background color.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Dialling display
Default
Setting
■Power saving mode
Tip
• The contents of Sub LCD light are:
On: Turn on for 3 seconds after closing 708SC, then
the bottom part of Sub LCD turns off.
Power saving mode: Turn on for 3 seconds after
closing 708SC, then turns off.
Off: Always off.
Sub LCD always turns off while 708SC is opened.
Default
Setting
■Font type: Normal
8-10
Display Settings
8
BSelect an item and make settings
To set font type
aSelect Font type
bUse s to switch font type
To set the font size
aSelect Font size
bUse s to select the size
To set font color
aSelect Font colour
bUse s to select the setting
cUse u to move cursor to Color selection
field and use s to select a color (For
Monochrome only)
To set background color
aSelect Background colour
bUse s to select the color
CPress c (Save)
Greeting Messages
Change power on message for Display.
APress c and select Settings →
Display settings →Greeting message
→Main LCD or Sub LCD
BEdit power on message text
Default
Setting
■Main LCD: No entry
■Sub LCD: No entry
8-11
Display Settings
8
Display Language
Set 708SC user interface to appear in English,
Japanese, or Korean.
APress c and select →
→Language or
BSelect English and press c (保存/
Save/)
Default
Setting
■日本語 (Japanese)
設定
一般設定
言語選択
8-12
Display Settings
8
Sound Settings
9-2
Sound Settings
9
Changing Profile Settings
Change 708SC incoming transmission response by
profile.
In Car Profile, select a different method to answer
calls.
AIn Standby, press * for 1+
seconds
BHighlight a profile and press w
(Edit)
To set Ringtone volume
aSelect Ringtone volume and select item to set
bUse s to adjust volume
cPress w (Play) to check the volume and
press c
dPress w (Save)
To set ringtone for Voice/Video Call
aSelect Ringtone and select Voice call or
Video call
bSelect the save location for files
9-3
Sound Settings
9
cHighlight a melody, select Options →Play
dPress o (Select)
ePress w (Save)
To set ringtone for S! Mail/SMS
aSelect Ringtone and select Messages
bSelect the setting
cPress w (Play) to check the ringtone and
press c
dPress w (Save)
To set vibrator
aSelect Vibration and select the items
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set ringtone duration for S! Mail/SMS
aSelect Message ringtone duration
bEnter duration and press c
To set sound effect or key tone volume
aSelect Key tone volume
bUse s to adjust the volume and press
c (Save)
To make sound effect
aSelect Phone sounds
bCheck an item to set and press w (Save)
To set key tone
aSelect Key tones
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set the answering method (Car Profile
only)
aSelect Call answer mode
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
9-4
Sound Settings
9
Sound settings in Settings
Sound settings in Settings is a menu for changing the
settings of Normal Profile. Other mode settings cannot
be changed.
Tip
• Ringtone volume
Select to adjust volume step by step. Ringtone
volume become louder gradually.
• Acoustic shock
Setting Acoustic shock function On, even with high
Ringtone volume for Voice Call/Video Call, the 708SC
rings at Level 1 volume for the first two seconds, then
at the set volume.
• Incoming call answering mode in Car Profile
With Any key set, answer an incoming call with any
key except w , o , y , or Side Key n or b.
With Automatic set, automatically answer it and talk
with the speaker without performing key operations.
• To set the time (seconds) to answer automatically in
Car Profile
After b in "To set the answering method" in Step 2,
select Automatic, press w (Edit), select the setting
and press c to set the answering method.
• To set a ringtone after recording with Voice
recorder
After b in "To set ringtone" in Step 2, select amr file.
• To adjust the volume while 708SC rings
Press Side Key n or b while 708SC rings.
• To set notification by display indicator only (Mute)
To set receiving notifications (for incoming calls/
received messages) by display indicator only, mute
Ringtone volume and set Vibration Off; 708SC shows
mute indicator ( ).
• To change ringtone title for S! Mail/SMS
aAfter b in "To set ringtone for S! Mail/SMS" in
Step 2, highlight Data Folder and press o
(Change)
bSelect location to save the file
cHighlight the file, select Options →Play
dPress o (Select)
ePress w (Save)
• To adjust the key tone volume in Standby
In Standby, press Side Key n or b.
9-5
Sound Settings
9
Profile settings
Available items vary by each Mode. The defaults are as listed below.
−: Setting deactivated
Profile
Item Normal Manner Car Meeting Outdoor
Ringtone volume
Voice call Level 4 −Level 4 Off Level 5
Video call Level 4 −Level 4 Off Level 5
Messages Level 4 −Level 4 Off Level 5
Ringtone
Voice call 03 acapella.mmf −03 acapella.mmf 03 acapella.mmf 03 acapella.mmf
Video call Techno
Dance.mp4 −Techno
Dance.mp4
Techno
Dance.mp4
Techno
Dance.mp4
Messages Pure −Pure Pure Pure
Vibration
Voice call On On On On On
Video call On On On On On
MessagesOnOnOnOnOn
9-6
Sound Settings
9
Profile
Item Normal Manner Car Meeting Outdoor
Ringtone duration
Messages 5 Seconds −5 Seconds 5 Seconds 5 Seconds
Key tone volume Level 2 −Level 4 Off Level 5
Phone sounds Several tones On Alerts on call Several tones On Alerts on call Several tones On
Key tones Xylophone −Xylophone Xylophone Xylophone
Call answer mode −−
Normal −−
Answer machine −On −−−
9-7
Sound Settings
9
Phone sounds setup items
Available items vary by each Mode. The volume of
these sounds follows the Key tone volume settings.
Item Description
All Check/uncheck all of the effect
sound items.
Popup box
alerts
Generate sound when a
confirmation or warning message
appears.
Minute minder Generate sound at approximately
every minute during a call.
Call connect
tone
When a call is initiated, the call is
connected before the ringtone
sounds on other party's handset and
you will be notified with a tone that
the other party will be called from
now.
Call end tone Generate sound at the end of a call.
Power on Generate sound when the power is
turned on.
Open/close
folder
Generate sound when opening or
closing handset.
Alerts on call
Generate sound when alarm is
activated or mail is received during
a call.
Item Description
9-8
Media Player
10-2
Media Player
10
Before Using Media
Player
Play sound or video files saved in Data Folder or
stream online media.
• From Music or Video menu, select Download
music or Download videos, to access Yahoo! Keitai
and download media files.
• Hear sound not only from the speaker, but also
using the stereo earphone microphone. Insert the
plug as shown in the figure below. When using the
speaker, unplug the stereo earphone microphone
from handset.
• Use the stereo earphone microphone not only for
listening to music but also for initiating voice calls.
When 708SC rings/vibrates while playing music
using a stereo earphone microphone, press the
switch on the stereo earphone microphone for 1+
seconds to answer the call.
Playable File Type
Left
Right
Stereo
Earphone
Charger
Player File (Extension)
Music MPEG4 Audio (mp4, aac, 3gp (Sound
only))
Video MPEG4 (mp4, 3gp)
Tip
• Other restrictions
Files other than described above saved in Sounds &
Ringtones in Data Folder are not playable with Media
Player. To play these files, select directly from Sounds
& Ringtones folder in Data Folder.
10-3
Media Player
10
Playing Music
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BPerform file selection operations
To select from All music
Select All music and highlight the file
To select from Recent music
Select Recent music and highlight the file
To select from Most played music
Select Most played music and highlight the file
To playback using Playlist ( P.10-7)
CPress c (Play)
aArtist's name and title (File name when the music
title information is unknown)
bSkin
cStatus : PLAY／PAUSE／STOP
dRepeat mode
(Off)／(One)／(Shuffle)／
(All)
eFile number/Total number of files
fPlaying volume
gTotal playing time
hElapsed playing time
iProgress bar
Ｎａｔｓｕ Ａｉｄａ−Ｅｖｅｎｉｎｇ Ｗａｌｔｚ
一時停止
再生
オフ゜ション
a
e
g
h
i
b
c
d
f
Melody Player Window
10-4
Media Player
10
All music
All playable files by Media Player's Music function
appear. Up to 9999 files can be listed.
Download music
Use Download music as shortcut to a download site.
Select to connect to a download site on the internet.
Music search
Music search of Media Player is a shortcut to a music
search site Music search. It allows you to search for
music by music category or keyword.
Recent music/Most played music
Recent music shows playback record in recent days. The
most recent played file appears on top of the list. Most
played music shows frequently played files record. The
most frequent played file appears on top of the list. Up
to 100 records can be saved.
Tip
• To end the playback and return to Options
Press C. If you press C while Options
appearing/operating Options;Options closes/returns to
the previous menu.
• If there is an incoming call while playing
The play pauses and a ringtone sounds. After the call is
ended, Media player continues to pause the playback.
• If Message is received while playing
or appears on the top of Display and 708SC
vibrates to notify you.
• When the time set for alarm has come while playing
Playing pauses, Alarm sounds and alarm details
appears. Press any key to stop Alarm sound and restart
playing. Press any key again to restore Media Player
display.
• To set melody file as Ringtone/Alert tone
While a file is highlighted or playing is paused or
stopped, press w (Set as) and choose how to use the
file. However, a file that cannot be set to be a ringtone
will not be set a ringtone.
• To use another function while listening to music
Use Switch Bar ( P.1-25).
10-5
Media Player
10
Player Window & List Options
Available items vary by file type, etc.
Item Description
Send Send file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
Add
Add files to Playlist. Select
Playlist to add all files contained
in another Playlist. Select Files to
add selected files to Playlist.
Move track in
playlist Change order of files in Playlist.
View bookmark
Access a page containing a
streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
View history
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Add to playlist
Files in All music are added to Play
List. Choose Selected file to add
highlighted file, or Multiple file to
add multiple files to Playlist.
Play by Play tracks by album, artist or
genre.
Delete Delete a highlighted file or all
files.
Rename Change file name.
Lock/Unlock Set/release file protection.
Details Confirm file size, etc.
Stop Stop playing.
Play via
Playback music files. When
Playback display, select Phone to
sound from speaker. Select A/V
headset to sound from speaker or
Bluetooth®-compatible devices
(stereo headphone, etc.) ( P.12-
7).
Transfer to A/V
headset/Transfer
to Phone
Toggle sound output between
Bluetooth®-compatible devices
(stereo headphone, etc.) and Phone
( P.12-7).
Download
content key Purchase or acquire Content Key.
Create playlist Create new Playlist ( P.10-6).
Rename Change Playlist name.
Open playlist Open Playlist.
Item Description
10-6
Media Player
10
Playing Melodies Using a
Playlist
Create Playlist
Create a maximum of 20 Playlists, each containing
up to 100 files.
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Options →Create playlist
CEnter Playlist name
DSelect the created Playlist
ESelect Options →Add →Files
Player settings Select settings related to Media
Player ( P.10-7).
Item Description Tip
•With Transfer to A/V headset is set
Raise/lower volume from A/V headset. 708SC cannot
be used to raise/lower volume.
10-7
Media Player
10
FCheck every file to save and press
w (Save)
Play
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Playlist to play, select Options
→Play
Changing Music Player
Settings
Repeat Mode
Play a single track repeatedly, all files in All music,
or tracks from Playlist, randomly or repeatedly.
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
Tip
• To create new Playlist by selecting all tracks in
existing Playlist:
aPerform Steps 1 to 3
bSelect Options →Add →Playlist
cSelect Playlist from which to add all melodies
• To change the name of Playlist
aHighlight Playlist, select Options →Rename
bEnter Playlist name
• To delete selected Playlist
Highlight Playlist, select Options →Delete →
Selected →Yes
• To delete all Playlists
aHighlight Playlist, select Options →Delete →All
bEnter Phone Password and press c (Confirm)
cSelect Yes
Default
Setting
■OFF
10-8
Media Player
10
BSelect Options →Player settings →
Repeat mode
CSelect an item and press c (Save)
Tone Volum e
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Options →Player settings →
Tone volume
CUse a to adjust the volume and
press c (Save)
Audio Skin
Set one of two images to appear on Display while
playing a melody.
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Options →Player settings →
Audio Skin
CSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Visualization Mode
Visualization On/Off
Select whether to display the skin set in
Visualization, to display the controller, and to
activate backlight settings on Display while playing
AAC or AAC+ format file within MPEG4.
Default
Setting
■Rainbow wave
Default
Setting
■On
10-9
Media Player
10
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Options →Player settings →
Visualization →Visualization mode
CSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Skin, Show Controller, & Backlight
Select one of 10 skins to display while playing a
melody file. To display this skin on the whole
window, set the Show controller to Hide. With the
Backlight set to Always on, while handset is open,
view the skin while listening to music.
APress c and select Media Player →
Music
BSelect Options →Player settings →
Visualization →Skin,Show controller,
or Backlight
CSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Playing Video
APress c and select Media Player →
Video
BPerform operations to select files
To select from All Video
Select All Video and highlight the file
To select from Recent video
Select Recent video and highlight the file
To select from Most Played video
Select Most Played video and highlight the file
To select from Playlist ( P.10-7)
Default
Setting
■Skin: Flowers
■Show controller: Show
■Backlight: Normal
10-10
Media Player
10
CPress c (Play)
aArtist's name and title (File name when the video
title information is unknown)
bPlaying status : PLAY/PAUSE/STOP
cProgress bar
dFile no./Total number of files
ePlaying volume level
fTotal playing time
gElapsed playing time
All Video
All playable files by Media Player's Video function
appear. Up to 9999 files can be listed.
Download videos
Use Download videos as shortcut to a download site.
Select to connect to a download site on the internet.
Recent video/Most Played video
Recent video shows playback record in recent days. The
most recent played file appears on top of the list. Most
Played Video shows frequently played files record. The
most frequent played file appears on top of the list. Up
to 100 records can be saved.
Ｎａｔｓｕ Ｍｏｖｉｅ−１
再生
a
g
b
c
d
e
f
Video Player Window
Tip
• To set video file as Ringtone
Highlight the file press w (Set as) with suspending
Playback, then perform operations to set ( P.11-11).
The operations are unavailable for files those cannot be
set for ringtone.
• Playlist
aAfter Step 1, select Options →Create playlist
bPerform Steps 2 to 5 in "Create Playlist" ( P.10-6)
10-11
Media Player
10
Player Window & List Options
Select Options in Player window or list and perform
operations listed below. Available items vary by file
type, etc.
Item Description
Full screen view Display video on the whole
window.
Add
Add files to Playlist. Select Playlist
to add all files contained in another
Playlist. Select files to add selected
(not all) files to Playlist.
Move track in
playlist Change order of files in Playlist.
Stop Stop playing video.
Edit Edit video files ( P.7-17).
Resolution Set video display size.
Send Send file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
View bookmark
Access a page containing a
streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
View history
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Add to playlist
Add a file to Playlist in All Video.
Select Selected file to add a
highlighted file to Playlist.
Select Multiple file to add multiple
files to Playlist.
Delete Delete a highlighted file or all files.
Rename Change file name.
Lock/Unlock Set/release file protection.
Details Confirm file size, etc.
Play via
Playback music files. When
Playback display, select Phone to
sound from speaker. Select A/V
headset to sound from speaker or
Bluetooth®-compatible devices
(stereo headphone, etc.) ( P.12-7).
Transfer to A/V
headset/
Transfer to
Phone
Toggle sound output between
Bluetooth®-compatible devices
(stereo headphone, etc.) and Phone
( P.12-7).
Item Description
10-12
Media Player
10
Player Settings
Repeat Mode
Set to play a file repeatedly; set to play all files in a
folder at random or repeatedly.
APress c and select Media Player →
Video
BHighlight a file and press c (Play)
CSelect Options →Player settings →
Repeat mode
DSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tone Volume
APress c and select Media player →
Video
BHighlight a file and press c (Play)
CSelect Options →Player settings →
Tone volume
DUse a to adjust the volume and
press c (Save)
Create Playlist Create new Playlist ( P.10-6).
Rename Change Playlist name.
Player settings
Select settings related to Media
Player
( P.10-11).
Default
Setting
■Off
Item Description
10-13
Media Player
10
Resolution
Set the size of videos appearing on Display during
play or pause.
APress c and select Media Player →
Video
BHighlight a file and press c (Play)
CSelect Options →Resolution and
select a size
10-14
Media Player
10
Managing Files
(Data Folder)
11-2
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Data Folder
708SC files are organized in folders by file format.
Default Folders
Data Folder contains six Default folders; new files
are saved to the appropriate folder (see right). Create
additional sub-folders in Default folders as required.
Ｄａｔａ Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ
Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅｓ
※
Sｏｕｎｄｓ ＆ Ｒｉｎｇｔｏｎｅｓ
※
S! Aｐｐｌｉ
Bｏｏｋ
Ｏｔｈｅｒ ｄｏｃｕｍｅｎｔｓ
※
Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ ｓｔａｔｕｓ
Ｖｉｄｅｏｓ
Default
※Sub-folder Pre-installed
(For files which come
pre-installed with
Folder Description File Formats1
Pictures All still images
JPEG, BMP, GIF,
WBMP, PNG,
Animation GIF
Videos All videos MPEG4 (3GP,
MP4)
Sounds
&
Ringtones
All sounds
recorded with
Voice Recorder,
downloaded music,
and other sound
files
SMAF/MIDI/SP-
MIDI,
MPEG4 Audio,
AMR
S! Appli S! Appli JAVA
Book
Save downloaded
electronic comic/
photo book files
CCF
Other
documents
Documents,
graphics/animation
requiring File
Viewer for display;
Flash® files,
vFiles, etc. are
saved here
SWF, SVG,
vCard,
vCalendar,
PDF, XLS,
DOC, PPT,
TXT,
Unsupported files
11-3
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
1 Copy or move sorted files (by their file types) to other
folders as required.
Memory status
By selecting Memory status, view the memory usage of
each Data Folder.
Alternatively, use the setup menu to view this ( P15-
8).
Download links
, displayed in Data Folder, is a shortcut to a
download site. If you select this shortcut, connect to a
download site on the internet.
Download Book feature
In Data Folder, Use Download Book in Book Folder as
shortcut to a download site. Select to connect to a
download site on the internet.
Tip
• Savable number of files/folders
Up to 999 files/folders can be saved each Default
Folder.
11-4
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Saved Files
Opening Files
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect the folder where a file is saved
CHighlight a file and press c (View/
Play/Select)
Tip
• To use Slide Show
aPerform Steps 1 to 3 to display images
bSelect Options →Slide show
• To enlarge or reduce image
aPerform Steps 1 to 3 to display an image
bSelect Options →Zoom
cPress w (), o ( ), or a to enlarge,
reduce, or scroll the image
dPress C to return to the previous window
• After enlarging/reducing image
After b in "To enlarge or reduce image," press o
( ) to display list window.
Press o ( ) to change window view; select another
file to check.
• File List Indicators
: Nontransferable
: Nontransferable and unusable
: Protected
: Copyrighted file (Transferable, Content Key
valid)
: Copyrighted file (Transferable, Content Key
expired)
: Copyrighted file (Nontransferable, Content Key
valid)
: Copyrighted file (Nontransferable, Content Key
expired)
: Wallpaper set ( P.11-10)
: Ringtone set ( P.11-11)
11-5
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Activating Camera or Voice Recorder from
Data Folder
Select Options →Take photo; activate Camera in
Camera mode by highlighting the Pictures folder or an
image file captured by 708SC.
In the same way, select Options →Record video;
activate Camera in Video mode by highlighting the
Videos folder or a video captured by 708SC.
Select Options →Record sound; activate Voice
Recorder by highlighting the Sounds & Ringtones
folder or sound file captured by 708SC.
• When another USIM Card is inserted into 708SC
Other than preinstalled nontransferable files/
preinstalled copyrighted files cannot be used.
• To show displayed image in Full screen view
After Step 3, select Options →Full screen view. For
partially displayed image, use a to change the
display area. Press o (Rotate) to rotate the image.
Press C to return to the previous view.
• Viewing File Details
Select Options →Details
Note
• A file that is larger than 3 MB cannot be displayed.
Also, a file that is larger than 1600 x 1200 pixels
cannot be edited or zoomed. A file that is larger
than 1.3 MB cannot be set as Incoming image or
Substitute Image.
11-6
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Using File Viewer
Open PDF, XLS, DOC, PPT, or TXT files saved in
Data Folder; File Viewer activates automatically.
Select Normal View or Full Screen View; navigate
files via Options or shortcuts.
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect file location then file
CSelect Options/navigation shortcuts to
navigate
To sc r o l l
Press a
To change Display appearance
Select Options →Full screen view or Normal
view
To enlarge or reduce the image
aSelect Options →Zoom
bPress In or Out to enlarge/reduce
To fit document size to Display
Select Options →Fit to screen
To move a page
Select Options →Go to and select an item
To move to specified page
aSelect Options →Go to →Page
bEnter page number
To capture current screen
Select Screen capture
Normal View
Full Screen View
Navigatio
n
11-7
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
To rotate image 90 degrees clockwise
aSelect Options →Rotate
bSelect Options →Rotate to return to the
previous window
To search words in the page
aSelect Options →Search
bEnter words
cPress 3 to continue searching forward or
press 1 to continue searching backward,
for the same word
To view assigned shortcut keys
Select Options →FileViewer shortcuts
File Viewer Settings
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect save location and select the file
CSelect Options →Settings
DPerform operations to set
To assign scroll range per press of a
aSelect Panning
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To fit text width to Display
aSelect Reflow
bSelect On and press c (Save)
Tip
• After capturing
Captured files are saved in Other documents in 708SC
Data Folder (Phone) as JPEG format.
Default
Setting
■ Panning: 10 pixel ■ Reflow: Off
■ Map on: On ■ Controller: On
■ Name: Capture
11-8
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
To set Map (shows display position) on/off
aSelect Map on
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To set guide for shortcuts in Full screen view
aSelect Options →Settings →Controller
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
To change default file mane
aSelect Name
bEnter a name
Navigation Shortcuts
Confirmation Window & List Options
For items other than window operation options, see
"Data Folder Options" ( P.11-13).
Tip
• When Reflow is set to On
Fit text width (such as doc. or txt.) to 708SC window
width. No need to scroll right/left to show the contents.
• When Map on is set to On
In bottom right of the window, map showing the
current position/area in the whole page appears. The
current position/area is indicated in red frame.
Key Description
Side Key nZoom in
Side Key bZoom out
2Move to the first page
4Move to the previous page
5Rotate 90 degrees clockwise or
cancel
6Move to the next page
8Move to the final page
*Select Normal View or Full Screen
View
Note
• If a document includes many pages or complicated
designs, all pages of the document may not be able
to be displayed.
• If a file includes any language other than Japanese
or English, that file may not appear properly.
11-9
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Viewing Graphics/Animation with
the SVG-T/Flash
®
Viewer
View SVG, SVGZ, and SWF formatted files in Data
Folder. When one of these files is selected from Data
Folder list, the SVG-T/Flash® Viewer is
automatically launched.
View the graphics/animation on Normal View or Full
Screen View. In either mode, Options and shortcut
(Key operations) are available to control Display.
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect file location then file
CSelect Options/navigation shortcuts to
navigate
To change Display appearance
Select Options →Full screen view or Normal
view
To enlarge or reduce the image
aSelect Options →Zoom
bPress w ( ) to enlarge an image or o
( ) to reduce
cUse a to scroll the window
dPress c to return to the previous window
To pause or restart an flash® image
Select Options →Pause or Resume
To select image quality
Select Options →Quality and select an item
To rotate the screen 90 degrees clockwise or
counterclockwise
Select Options →Rotate and select an item
Normal View Full Screen View
11-10
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Confirmation Window & List Options
For items other than window operation options, see
"Data Folder Options" ( P.11-13).
Sorting Files
Sort files in various ways.
ASelect Options →Sort by
BSelect an item
To sort files in descending order of dates
Select Date
To sort files by file types
Select Type
To sort files by file names
Select Name
To sort files in ascending order of size
Select Size
To sort files by status of Content Key
Select Activation Status
Tip
• To set an image for Wallpaper
Press w (Set as) on Normal View, or in Options of
Full Screen View, select Set as and select Wallpaper.
Tip
• When folders are contained in a list
Folders are placed at the top in any order.
• Sorting order when Type is selected
Files are sorted in the alphabetical order of the file
extension (For example doc, jpg, swf, and such).
• Sorting order when Name is selected
Files are sorted in the order of number →
alphanumerics → Japanese character of the file names.
• Sorting order when Activation status is selected
Files are displayed in the following order:
Unrestricted file → Nontransferable file →
Copyrighted file (Content Key valid) → Copyrighted
file (Content Key expired) → Nontransferable and
unusable file
11-11
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Using Files
Wallpaper
Set an image file as Wallpaper of Display, an image
in Phonebook, or a Substitute Image for Video Calls
to display with incoming calls.
AHighlight a file and press w (Set as)
To set while viewing an image
Highlight a file, press c (View) and press
w (Set as)
BSet the Use of the File
To set as Wallpaper on Display
Select Wallpaper, confirm the preview and
press c (Set)
To set as Phonebook image for use with an
incoming call
aSelect Caller ID
bSearch and select an entry in which to place
the image and press c (Set)
To set as Substitute Image for use with an
incoming Video Call
aSelect Still picture
bPress c (Save)
Tip
• To edit a still image ( P.7-15)
• To create a mobile postcard ( P.7-7)
• To print a still image ( P.12-12)
11-12
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Setting Sound File as Ringtone
Change ringtone settings in Normal profile ( P.3-3).
APress c, select Data Folder and
select location to save the file
BHighlight the file and press w (Set as)
CPerform operations to set
To set ringtone for Voice Calls
Select Voice ringtone
To set ringtone for Video Calls
Select Video ringtone
To set ringtone for Phonebook entries
aSelect Caller ringtone
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry
To set ringtone for S! Mail/SMS
Select Message alert tone
Setting Video File as Ringtone
Change ringtone settings in Normal profile ( P.3-3).
APress c, select Data Folder and
select location to save the file
BHighlight the file and press w (Set as)
CPerform operations to set
To set video file as ringtone for Voice Call
Select Voice ringtone
To set video file as ringtone for Video Call
Select Video ringtone
To set ringtone for Phonebook entries
Select Caller ringtone
Tip
• Settings Restriction
MPEG4 files with audio codec (AAC, AAC+, or
Enhanced AAC+), can be set only when they are
copyrighted.
11-13
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Setting Flash® file as
Wallpaper
APress c and select Data Folder →
Other documents
To set while viewing a Flash® image
Highlight the file, press c (View) and press
w (Set as)
BHighlight the file, press w (Set as)
CSelect Wallpaper
DCheck preview window and press
c (Set)
Saving a vFile
vFile is the standard format to exchange Phonebook
data, etc. via the Internet. 708SC uses vCard
(extension: vcf) format for Phonebook data; also uses
vCalendar (extension: vcs) format for Schedule/To
Do data.
Save a vFile stored in Data Folder to Phonebook,
calendar, or as a scheduled event.
APress c, select Data Folder and
select save location for the vFile
BSelect a file and press c (Register)
Tip
• Settings Restriction
MPEG4 files (mp4, 3gp) with audio codec (AAC,
AAC+, or Enhanced AAC+), can be set only when they
are copyrighted.
11-14
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Data Folder Options
Perform the following operations from Options in list
or viewing windows. Options that appear vary by the
type of file or folder.
For Options used for the File Viewer or SVG-T/
Flash® Viewer, see "Using File Viewer" ( P.11-5) or
"Viewing a Graphics/Animation with the SVG-T/
Flash® Viewer" ( P.11-8).
Item Description
Edit Edit a still image or Videos ( P.7-15).
Dynamic Effect/
Dynamic effect
list
Create Flash® images using Still
images ( P.7-19).
Full screen view Display Still image in full screen
( P.11-5).
Playback
Playback video files.
When playback display, select Phone
to sound from speaker.
Select A/V headset to sound from
Bluetooth®-compatible devices (stereo
headphone, etc.) ( P.12-7).
Transfer to A/V
headset
Switch sound output to Bluetooth®-
compatible devices (stereo headphone,
etc.) ( P.12-7).
Register to
phonebook
Export a vCard file to Phonebook
( P.11-12).
Register to
Calendar
Export a vCalendar file to Calendar
( P.11-12).
Send Send file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
mPostcard Create a mobile postcard ( P.7-7).
Zoom Enlarge or reduce still image being
confirmed ( P.11-3).
Browser access Access linked site included in
electronic comic/photo book files.
Sort by Sort files ( P.11-9).
Move Move files from/to 708SC another
folder.
Copy Copy files and paste from/to 708SC
another folder.
Item Description
11-15
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Add to playlist
Add files to Playlist.
Highlight Selected and select to add a
file.
Highlight Multiple and select to add
multiple files at once.
Delete Delete a file/files ( P.11-17).
Delete folder Delete a folder ( P.11-17).
Take photo Activate Camera in Camera mode
( P.11-4).
Record video Activate Camera in Video mode
( P.11-4).
Record sound Activate Voice Recorder ( P.11-4).
Rename Change file name ( P.11-15).
Rename folder Change folder name ( P.11-15).
Show/Hide file
info
In List window for Picture Folder with
thumbnail view, set to display folder/
file name when highlighted.
Item Description
View By
Select List window type for Picture
Folder.
Select List to show folder/file in list
view.
Select Thumbnail view to show folder/
file in thumbnail view.
Create folder Create a new folder ( P.11-15).
Print via Print Still images using the printer via
USB/Bluetooth® connection.
Lock/Unlock Set/release file protection.
Download
content key Purchase or acquire Content Key.
Details Confirm file/folder properties.
Content key
info
Show the list of Content Keys for the
files in Data Folder; manage them by
selecting Delete to delete ( P.11-19)
or Details to check the details.
Item Description
11-16
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
Managing Files/Folders
Create Folder
Create sub-folders in Default folders.
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect Default folder to create a
sub-folder
CSelect Options →Create folder
DEnter a name
Changing a File Name/Folder
Name
Change the name of a file or a created sub-folder.
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect Default folder and highlight a
sub-folder or a file to change the
name, select Options →Rename
folder or Rename
CEnter a name
Moving a File/Folder
Move a file/folder to another folder or a location
outside folders.
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect Default folder and highlight a
sub-folder or a file to move
CSelect Options →Move
Tip
• When a file is locked
You cannot change the file name.
11-17
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
DMove the file or folder
To move one file or all files in the same folder
or all created sub-folders
Select Selected or All
To select and move multiple files or created
sub-folders
aSelect Multiple
bCheck files or created sub-folders to move
and press w (Move)
ESelect the destination folder →Move
here
Copying Files/Folders
Make a copy of a file or folder in another folder or a
location outside folders.
APress c and select Data Folder
BHighlight a folder or a file to copy,
select Options →Copy
Tip
• To check/uncheck all files or folders at once
Press o (Mark all) or o (Unmark all)
• When a file is locked
You cannot move the file.
• When there is a file or folder with the same name at
the destination
You have to change the name of the file or folder to
move. In message text, enter a new name.
Note
• The files downloaded with 708SC may not appear/
playback properly when moving to other mobile
phones or inserting other's USIM Card into 708SC.
11-18
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
CCopy the file or folder
To copy one file or all files in the same folder
or all folders
Select Selected or All
To select and copy multiple files or folders
aSelect Multiple
bCheck files or folders to copy and press
w (Copy)
DSelect the destination folder and
select Paste here
Deleting a File/Folder
Delete
APress c and select Data Folder
BHighlight a file, select Options →
Delete
Tip
• To check/uncheck all files or folders at once
( P.11-16)
• When a copy of a file or folder is pasted to the same
location as the original
•The pasted file or folder is saved under another name,
i.e., _001 is automatically added to the name.
• When there is a file or folder with the same name in
the destination
You have to change the name of the file or folder to
paste. In message text, enter a new name.
Note
• The file that forwarding is impossible and the
copyrighted file cannot be copied.
11-19
Managing Files(Data Folder)
11
CDelete the file
To delete one file
Select Selected →Yes
To delete all files from the same folder
aSelect All
bEnter Phone Password press c (Confirm)
and select Yes
To select and delete multiple files
aSelect Multiple
bCheck files, press w (Delete)
cEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm) (If all files are checked)
dSelect Yes
Delete Folder
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect Default folder and highlight a
created sub-folder to delete, select
Options →Delete folder
CEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
If no file saved in a sub-folder
Phone Password is not required.
Tip
• To check/uncheck files or folders at once ( P.11-16)
• If a file is set as Wallpaper or ringtone, or locked
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to execute
deletion. To delete multiple or all files, select No to
delete only those files without setting or protection.
• When file has Content Key
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to delete
both the file and Content Key.
11-20
Deleting a Content Key
APress c and select Data Folder
BSelect Options →Contents key info
CPerform operations to delete
To delete a Content Key
Select Selected
To delete all Content Keys
Select Delete all
Tip
• If a folder contains files set as Wallpaper, ringtones,
or locked/copyrighted files
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to execute
folder deletion. Select No to delete only files without
designated uses or protection, leaving the folder
undeleted.
• When file in a folder has Content Key
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to delete
both the file and Content Key.
External Connections
12-2
External Connections
12
External Connections
Send and receive data to/from a Bluetooth®-
compatible device, without any physical connection.
Alternatively, connect 708SC with various devices,
like a Personal Computer or a printer to exchange
data or print out images via a USB cable.
Bluetooth®
Exchange data among Bluetooth®-compatible
devices including mobile phones such as 708SC
using signals. When a Bluetooth® handsfree device
is connected, converse without operating 708SC
directly with your hands. Alternatively, use a dialup-
connection devices, to access the Internet or for other
purposes.
Before Using Bluetooth®
Communications
Bluetooth® communications can be performed only
when others using Bluetooth®-compatible devices
with the same profiles.
The Bluetooth® specifications of 708SC are as listed
below.
Item Specification
Communication
Standard Bluetooth® Standard Version 1.2
Applicable
profiles
Headset
Handsfree
Serial Port
Dialup Networking
File Transfer
Object Push
Advanced Audio Distribute
Audio/Video Remote Control
Basic Imaging
Basic Printing1
Output Bluetooth® Power Class2
12-3
External Connections
12
1 For Printing function only.
2 Varies by radio interference and other conditions.
Bluetooth® Precautions
• 708SC may not work with all Bluetooth®-
compatible devices.
• Exchanging data may be unavailable with some
devices even if they are Bluetooth®-compatible
devices and they may have different operating
procedures, displays or actions of 708SC,
depending on their characteristics and/or
specifications.
• The radio band (2.4GHz) used by Bluetooth®-
compatible devices is also used by various other
devices. Therefore, the transmission rate or
distance may be reduced or communications may
be blocked due to the influences of other devices.
• Talking using wireless or handsfree mode may
induce noise depending on the other connected
devices and/or the communications environment.
• 708SC Bluetooth® function does not allow
multiple devices when Bluetooth®-compatible
headset is connected.
• USB and Bluetooth® functions cannot be used at
the same time.
• Set the Bluetooth® function off before connecting
a USB cable to handset.
Line-of-signal
distance2Approximately 10 meters or less
Frequency band
used 2.4 GHz
Item Specification
Tip
• To check Bluetooth® functions available
aPress c and select Settings →Connectivity →
Bluetooth →Bluetooth service
bSelect an item and view the contents
• To confirm the device address of 708SC
Press c and select Settings →Connectivity →
Bluetooth →My Information
12-4
External Connections
12
Sending & Receiving Data
Send and receive Phonebook entries, My Phonebook
details, Schedule information, Task information, still
images, video, sound files, vFiles, and others.
Activation
Setting the Bluetooth® function On activates
connection with a Bluetooth®-compatible device and
causes to appear at the top of Display.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →
Activation
BSelect the setting
Search New Device
Register a Bluetooth®-compatible device to the My
devices list. Register a maximum of 10 devices.
When registering a device, the same passkey must be
entered into 708SC and the other device.
Activate the Bluetooth® function of the other device
beforehand.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →My
devices
BSelect Search new device
CWhen devices replying to the search
have appeared, select the device to
register
DEnter passkey (4 to 16 digits) and
press c
Default
Setting
■Off
12-5
External Connections
12
EWithin 30 seconds, enter the same
passkey on the other device
Tip
• Passkey
The Passkey is a password used to connect
Bluetooth®-compatible devices. When connecting to a
handsfree device, enter the Passkey specified for it.
You are not required to enter the Passkey again for a
registered device.
• If authentication with the other device has failed
A confirmation message appears asking whether to try
authentication again. Select Yes to retry.
• If ten peripheral devices have already been
registered
A message indicating the device memory is full
appears.
• To check Bluetooth® functions available for each
device
aPress c and select Settings →Connectivity →
Bluetooth →My devices
bHighlight a device, select Options →Service list
cHighlight an item, select Options →Help and view
the contents
• To change the name of a registered device
aPress c and select Settings →Connectivity →
Bluetooth →My devices
bHighlight a device, select Options →Rename
cEnter a new name
• To delete a device from My devices
aPress c and select Settings →Connectivity →
Bluetooth →My devices
bHighlight a device, select Options →Delete →
Selected or All
cEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) (In the
case of All only) and select Yes
• To search for or register a device from other
Bluetooth®-compatible devices ( P.12-10)
12-6
External Connections
12
Icons displayed on the My devices list
The device name is preceded by the following icons.
: Personal Computer : Mobile phone
: Handsfree device/Headset
: PDA : Printer : Other
Connection request from another Bluetooth®-
compatible device
If a message indicating that there is a connection
request from another Bluetooth®-compatible device
appears, select Yes and enter the same Passkey as that of
the other device within 30 seconds.
If there is a connection request from an already
registered device, such as a handsfree device, 708SC
will be automatically connected.
Sending Files
Send data from Options of function windows. After
the receiving side approves a communication,
sending is started.
APerform operations to set
To send files from Data Folder
aHighlight the data to send
bIn list window, select Options →Send →Via
bluetooth
To send files from other functions (except
Data Folder)
aIn list window for each functions, highlight
the data to send
bSelect Options →Send →Via bluetooth
BSelect the device of the receiver
When the receiver's device has not been
registered
Select Service new device, search for that device
and register it ( P.12-4)
Tip
• To send data after viewing the contents
Some functions allow sending option from Details/
Playback window.
12-7
External Connections
12
Receiving a File
When connection from the sender is approved, file
reception starts and the received file is saved in Data
Folder.
AWhen a confirmation window
appears, select Yes
A/V Headset
Connect Bluetooth®-compatible headphone/headset
devices to Media Player to enjoy playback sounds.
APlayback Melody/video files using
Media Player ( P.10-3, 10-9)
BSelect Options →Transfer to A/V
headset
CSelect headset device
To register device
Select Search new device and search the device
to register ( P.12-4)
Print Still image in Data Folder
Connect Bluetooth®-compatible printer to 708SC;
enable to print Still images/vFiles in Data Folder
directly through handling 708SC. Set paper size/
number for printing with 708SC.
See User Guide attached to printer for printer
operations/paper settings.
Tip
• Operations while Melody is stopped
aIn Melody Playback window, select Options →
Play via → A/V headset
bSelect the destination device or Search new device
and search the device to register ( P.12-4)
12-8
External Connections
12
AIn Data Folder list window, highlight
still image/vFile
BSelect Options →Print via →
Bluetooth
CSelect receiver's device
To register receiver's device
Select Search new device to search and register
(P.12-4)
DPerform operations to set
To set a paper size
Select Paper size and the setting
To set the number of copies
Select Number of copies, enter the number of
copies (1 to 99) and press c
To set the number of pages to print on a sheet
Select Paper per sheet and the setting (1 to 16)
To set whether or not to print the date
Select Date print and the setting
To set whether or not to print a frame
Select Frame and the setting
To set a print quality
Select Print quality and the setting
EPress o (Preview)
FCheck the preview window and press
c (Print)
Accessing Connected Device Files
Access the shared folders and files of the other
party's device. Alternatively, receive or delete data
residing on the other device.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →My
devices
BSelect a device
12-9
External Connections
12
CApprove access on the side sharing
the data
Locations of received files
Received files are automatically saved to Data Folder.
The type of the folder that a file is saved to vary by file
format; for example, JPEG and BMP files are saved to
the Pictures folder and vFiles to the Other documents
folder.
Connecting Handsfree
Register the handsfree device following the steps for
"Search for and Register a Bluetooth®-Compatible
Device" ( P.12-4) beforehand.
Waiting Connection Request
In the steps given below, 708SC is placed in mode
waiting for a handsfree-device connection request.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →My
devices
BSelect a handsfree-compatible device
When Passkey entry window appears
Enter the same Passkey as is set for the
handsfree device
Answering Mode
If the setting is changed to Automatic a call to 708SC
will be answered without the operation of any keys.
Tip
• To receive an accessed file
After Step 3, select a file to receive.
Default
Setting
■Normal
12-10
External Connections
12
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →
Answering mode
BSelect the setting
Handsfree Mode
Select answer settings for calls when handsfree
devices connected.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →
Handsfree setting
BSelect the setting
Changing Bluetooth® Settings
My Phone's Visibility
Tip
• To set the time (Seconds) before automatic
reception
After Step 1, highlight Automatic, select Options →
Edit and select the number of seconds to ring before
answering.
Default
Setting
■ Handsfree Mode
Tip
• While Private Mode is set
Answer outgoing/incoming calls with 708SC for calls
made with 708SC; answer outgoing/incoming calls
with handsfree devices for calls made with handsfree
devices.
• While Handsfree Mode is set
Answer all outgoing/incoming calls with handsfree
devices.
Default
Setting
■On
12-11
External Connections
12
To activate search and saving from other Bluetooth®-
compatible devices, you have to make your 708SC
visible.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →My
phone's visibility
BSelect the setting
Bluetooth® Name
The displayed name shown on another device for
your 708SC can be changed.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →My
Information
BSelect Bluetooth Name
CModify the name and press c
Default
Setting
■708SC
12-12
External Connections
12
Secure Mode for Data Transfer
If set On, a confirmation message appears before you
sending data.
APress c and select Settings →
Connectivity →Bluetooth →Secure
mode
BSelect the setting
USB Connection
Connect 708SC to a PC via a USB cable to exchange
data between the devices. Alternatively, connect a
printer to print still images.
Connecting to a PC
Perform the following:
• Send files from Data Folder of 708SC
• Receive files from the PC and saving them to Data
Folder
• Perform packet data communications
Before Using the USB Connection
Before connecting 708SC to a PC with a USB cable,
you have to install the USB driver and the Samsung
PC Studio. For more information about the
installation procedure, operating conditions of a PC
available, etc., see the User's guide in the attached
CD-ROM.
Connecting to a Printer
Connect 708SC to a PictBridge-compatible printer
with a USB cable and directly print still images from
Default
Setting
■On
12-13
External Connections
12
Data Folder. Alternatively, set a paper size, number
of copies, and other items from 708SC.
For more information about printer operations and
paper setting, see the printer's User Manual.
Printing a Still Image from Data
Folder
AHighlight a still image file in Data
Folder
BSelect Options →Print via → USB
CConnect 708SC to a printer with a
USB cable
DSelect the printer settings
To set a paper size
Select Paper size and select the setting
To set the number of copies
Select Number of copies, enter the number of
copies (1 to 99) and press c
12-14
To set the number of pages to print on a sheet
Select Paper per sheet and select the setting (1
to 16)
To set whether or not to print the date
Select Date print and select the setting
To set whether or not to print a frame
Select Border and select the setting
To set a print quality
Select Print quality and select the setting
EPress c
FCheck the preview window and press
c (Print)
Note
• Never disconnect the USB cable during printing.
Security
13-2
Security
13
Change Phone Password
APress c and select Settings →
Security →Change phone password
BEnter current Phone Password and
press c (Confirm)
CEnter new Phone Password (4 digits)
and press c (Confirm)
DEnter new Phone Password again
and press c (Confirm)
PIN
PINs are security codes for USIM Card. For more
information, see "USIM Card" ( P.1-2).
Changing PIN/PIN2
APress c and select Settings →
Security →Change PIN code or
Change PIN2 code
BEnter current PIN or PIN2 and press
c (Confirm)
CEnter new PIN or PIN2 (4 to 8 digits)
and press c (Confirm)
DEnter new PIN or PIN2 again and
press
c (Confirm)
Default
Setting
■9999
Note
• When PIN lock ( P.13-3) is set to Disable, PIN
cannot be changed.
13-3
Security
13
PIN Lock
To require PIN authentication each time the power is
turned on, set this function to Enable.
APress c and select Settings →
Security →PIN lock
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
CEnter PIN and press c (Confirm)
Resetting PIN Lock
If PIN or PIN2 is been incorrectly entered three
consecutive times, PIN or PIN2 lock is set,
restricting operations of 708SC. Unlock PIN or PIN2
lock in the steps given below.
AWith PIN lock unlocking code (PUK
Code) entry window displayed, enter
PUK Code and press c (Confirm)
BEnter new PIN or PIN2 (4 to 8 digits)
and press c
CEnter new PIN or PIN2 again and
press c
Default
Setting
■Enable
13-4
Security
13 USIM Lock
Set handset so that it is deactivated unless a USIM
password is entered when another USIM Card is
installed in handset.
APress c and select Settings →
Security →USIM lock
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
CEnter a USIM password (4 to 8
digits) and press c (Confirm)
To se t Disable
The settings are saved and the operation
completes.
To se t Enable
Proceed to Step 4
DEnter the USIM password again and
press c (Confirm)
Note
• For more information about PIN and PIN2 lock
unlocking codes (PUK and PUK2 Codes), contact
Customer Service ( P.25-25).
• If incorrect PIN lock unlocking code is entered ten
consecutive times, USIM Card is locked (The count
is not cleared when handset is turned off).
• There is no way to unlock the locked USIM Card.
Contact Customer Service ( P.25-25).
Default
Setting
■Disable
13-5
Security
13
Handset Security
Phone Lock
Set Phone lock to Enable; then Phone Password
entry is required each time the power is turned on.
APress c and select Settings →
Security →Phone lock
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
CEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
Password Lock
Set Password lock to Enable; then hide Softkeys in
Standby. Press any key; Phone Password entry
window appears. Enter Phone Password to cancel
Password lock; 708SC operations are enabled.
APress c and select Settings →
Security →Password lock
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
CEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
Tip
• USIM password
This is a password dedicated to USIM Card
authentication. If the USIM password matches, the
other USIM Card can also be used for 708SC.
Change USIM password each time the USIM check
setting is set to Enable.
• When you forget your USIM password
Insert a USIM Card (with USIM lock set to Enable) to
708SC and execute All reset ( P.13-11).
Default
Setting
■Disable
Default
Setting
■Disable
13-6
Security
13
Privacy
L
ock
Set Privacy lock to require Phone Password entry
each time calling up checked function/functions
(selected among All,Messages,Data Folder,
Phonebook,Call log,Calendar).
APress c and select Settings →
Security →Privacy lock
BCheck the functions to lock and press
w (Save)
CEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
Activate Secret Mode
Set Secret Mode to Hide; then hide the saved entry
information (with Phonebook Secret Mode On) in
Phonebook list.
APress c and select Settings →
Security →Activate Secret mode
BEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
CSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tip
• When Password lock is canceled
Password lock is automatically set to Disable.
Default
Setting
■Unlock all
Default
Setting
■Hide
13-7
Security
13
Mobile Tracker
Set Mobile tracker to On; then 708SC notifies when
another USIM Card (not the one in 708SC during the
setting operations) is inserted. Set SMS address for
notification. Up to 2 addresses can be specified.
APress c and select Settings →
Security →Mobile tracker
BEnter Phone Password and press
c (Confirm)
CSelect Activation field
DSelect On and press c (Select)
ESelect Recipients field and enter an
address
To select an address from Phonebook
aHighlight To field and select Options →
Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
cHighlight phone number and press c
(Select)
To enter a phone number directly
aHighlight To field and select Options →
Direct input
bEnter phone number
FPress w (Done)
GSelect Sender field and enter a
sender's name
Tip
• Under following conditions, 708SC turns the setting
to Hide;Activate Secret mode is set to Show then
708SC is powered on again.
Default
Setting
■Off
13-8
Security
13
HPress w (Save)
IPress w (Accept) after checking the
items
With another USIM Card inserted
When powered on replacing with another USIM Card;
708SC send a notification SMS to your specified
address during the handset activation. The SMS sending
never come to the person (who replace the USIM
Card)'s notice. 708SC also send a notification SMS
when Phone Password is incorrectly entered three
consecutive times during Mobile tracker setting is Off.
Rejecting Incoming Calls
Reject calls by callers who do not send caller IDs/by
callers who are unable to send caller IDs. In addition,
nuisance calls can also be rejected by registering the
caller phone numbers to a Black list.
Tip
• To delete an address
After Step 5, highlight the address, select Options →
Delete
13-9
Security
13
Reject Withheld
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →All calls →Reject incoming
calls
BSelect Reject withheld field
CSelect the setting and press c
DPress w (Save)
Reject Unavailable
Reject/accept calls by callers who are unable to send
caller IDs, like International calls from overseas/
transferred calls from landlines.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →All calls →Reject incoming
calls
BSelect Reject unavailable field
CSelect the setting and press c
DPress w (Save)
Black List
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →All calls →Reject incoming
calls
BSelect Black list field
CSet the phone number
To enter a phone number directly
aSelect Options →Add →Direct input
bEnter phone number
Default
Setting
■Off
Default
Setting
■Off
13-10
Security
13
To select a phone number from Phonebook
aSelect Options →Add →Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
cSelect phone number
To enter a phone number using Call Log
aSelect Options →Add →Call log
bSelect the log record
DPress C and press w (Save)
Reject Black List
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →All calls →Reject incoming
calls
BSelect Reject black list field
CSelect the setting and press c
DPress w (Save)
Calls from phone numbers in Black list
Calls are not connected. Caller hears a busy tone.
Missed call appears in Standby. Press w (View) to see
Missed Calls.
Tip
• To delete phone numbers from Black list
aPerform Steps 1 and 2
bHighlight the phone number to delete, select
Options →Delete →Selected or All →Yes
13-11
Security
13
Restoring Defaults
Clear Memory
Clear Data Folder, Messaging folders, Phonebook
(Phone) entries, and Calendar entries each or all at
once.
APress c and select Settings →
Memory settings →Phone memory →
Clear memory
BCheck items to reset and press
w (OK)
CEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
Master Reset
Reset Settings
Clear Saved contents/settings and restore defaults.
However, the following contents are not restored.
Setting menu Content not to be reset
Phone settings Contents set in Time and Date fields
for Time & date
Display settings Contents set in Brightness
Call settings
All calls→Reject incoming calls→
contents saved in Black list
Voice call/Video call→contents saved/
set in Diverts
Voice call→contents set in Call
waiting
Contents set in Call barring
Contents set in Voice mail
Phonebook
settings
Contents saved/set in My phonebook
details,Category settings
Connectivity Preferred networks
Security USIM lock,PIN lock,Change PIN
code,Change PIN2 code
13-12
APress c and select Settings →
Memory settings →Phone memory →
Master reset →Reset settings
BEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
Reset All
Restore 708SC defaults and delete Phonebook
(Phone), Messaging, and Data Folder contents/
settings. Original files and S! Appli are restored.
APress c, select Settings →Memory
settings →Phone memory →Master
reset →Reset all
BEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
Tools
14-2
Tools
14
Alarms
Wake-up Alarm/Alarms
Register a Wake-up alarm and 4 other alarms. Each
alarm can be named and the name given to Alarm
appears when Alarm sounds. Once an alarm time is
saved, it can only be set/reset by switching Alarm
activation to On or Off. In addition to setting one
time only alarm, set alarms to repeat on specific days
of the week or everyday.
APress c and select Tools →Alarms
BSelect an alarm from Wake-up alarm
to Alarm4
CSelect Alarm activation field
DSelect On and press c
ESelect and set other items as required
Set a name (Wake-up alarm cannot be edited)
aSelect Alarm name field
bEnter the name to set
Set Alarm time
Highlight Alarm time field and enter the time
Set an Alarm sound
aSelect Alert tone field
bSelect the location of sound file, select an
alarm sound and press c
Set Vibrator
aSelect Vibration field
bSelect the setting and press c
Set Alarm volume
aSelect Alarm volume field
bUse s to adjust the volume
cPress w (Play) to check the volume and
press c (Save)
14-3
Tools
14
Set whether to sound repeatedly or only one
time
aSelect Repeat field
bSelect Everyday or Once alarm and press
c
Set days of the week for a repeated alarm to
sound
aSelect Repeat field
bSelect Specify days and press c (Edit)
cCheck the days to set and press w (OK)
Set a snooze procedure
aSelect Snooze field
bSelect the setting and press c
If you do not want to activate Alarm yet
aSelect Alarm activation field
bSelect Off and press c
FPress w (Save)
Tip
• When wake-up alarm/alarms are set
appears.
• When wake-up alarm and/or multiple alarms have
been set for the same activation time
Wake-up alarm takes priority over Alarm1 to Alarm4.
Among alarms, the last set one takes priority.
• Alarm volume settings
Select to adjust volume step by step. Alarm volume
become louder gradually.
14-4
Tools
14
When the time set for Wake-up alarm/Alarm
comes
Alarm sounds and a message appears if an alarm sound
is set to mute ( P.9-4), you are notified by the vibrator
even when Alarm sound is not set to On in Step 5.
Alternatively, notify using vibrator with vibration
setting On. Press any key to stop Alarm sound and press
any key again to clear the message.
When Snooze is not set to Off
Until Snooze canceling operation takes place, alarm
notification continues for about one minute repeatedly
in specified time intervals. The notification repeated up
to six times. If no key operation or any key operations
other than y,o (End) take place during alarm
notification, alarm sound stops; notification with alarm
is set to sound again after specified time elapsed. To
cancel Snooze, press y or o (End).
When a call is being initiated or during a call
During a call or connection (Connecting…appears),
708SC notifies with a short sound and indicator;
uncheck Alerts on call (in Phone sounds setting) to
notify only by an indicator. When an outgoing call is
being Initiated (Dialing…appears), 708SC notifies with
a short sound and indicator as connection established.
Press any key twice to clear an indicator; with Snooze
On, press o (End).
When the time set comes while capturing video
or recording sound
Alarm sound is generated as soon as capturing of
recording finishes.
Auto Power On
If you set this setting to On, even when the power is
turned off, the power is automatically turned on at
the time set for a wake-up alarm or alarm.
APress c and select Tools →Alarms
→Auto power
BSelect On or Off and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■Off
14-5
Tools
14
When the Time for Wake-up alarm/Alarm
comes
708SC automatically turned the power on. Deactivating
alarm sound, display indicator, snooze function is
performed by the same operation as usual ( P.14-4).
Stop alarm sound and go off display indicator; 708SC
shows Standby display and continues to power on.
Calendar
Displaying Calendar
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
Viewing Calendar
There are three modes for displaying Calendar.
Select a date on Monthly or Weekly view window to
display Daily view window for the selected day.
Note
• Cancel Auto power settings under following
conditions; near electronic devices requiring high-
precision control or handling weak signals, in places
such as airplanes or hospitals prohibiting the use of
mobile phones.
Monthly View Window
: Highlighted position
(Date in light blue) : Current
day
Date in red: Holiday/Sunday
Weekly View Window
(In Yellow) : Anniversary
registered
(In Blue) : Schedule registered
(In Green) : Memo registered
(In Red) : Task registered
Daily View
: Schedule
: Anniversary
: Holiday
: Memo
: Task
: Priority
: Alarm set
: Repetition set
14-6
Tools
14
Calendar Window Format
Set Calendar to begin with Sunday or Monday.
Alternatively, set the window displayed when
activating Calendar.
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options →Settings
CSelect settings
Set the first day of week
aSelect Starting day
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Set the default view mode
aSelect Default view mode
bSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Tip
• To display the previous or next month on Monthly
view window
Press */#, highlight Year/Month field and
press s
• To display the previous or next week on Weekly
view window
Press */#, highlight Year/Month field and
press s
• To display the previous or next day on Daily view
window
Press s,*, or #
• To view a particular month or week
From Monthly view window or Weekly view window,
change Display by specifying year, month, and day as
follows.
aIn the calendar window, select Options →Go to
bSelect Date, enter the year, month, and day and
press c
When Today is selected in Step b, the current date is
highlighted on the window of the current month or
week.
Default
Setting
■Starting day: Sunday
■Default view mode: Monthly view
14-7
Tools
14
Saving New Entries to
Calendar
Scheduled Events
Save a maximum of 100 items.
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options →Add new →
Schedule
CSelect items and make settings
Set a title
Select Title field and enter a text
Set details
Select Details field and enter a text
Set a starting date
Highlight Start date field and enter a date
Set a starting time
Highlight Start time field and enter a time
Set an ending date
Highlight End date field and enter a date
Set an ending time
Highlight End time field and enter a time
Set an event location
Select Location field and enter a text
Tip
• When settings are changed
A change in Starting day is immediately reflected.
Selecting the settings of Default view mode can be
applied when you deactivate calendar and then
reactivate it.
• To temporarily change display mode
In the calendar window, select Options →View mode
→ Display mode
14-8
Tools
14
Set an alarm
aCheck Alarm field to select
bHighlight Before field, enter an interval
before Alarm time, use s to highlight Unit
field and switch to an appropriate unit
cSelect Alert tone field, select a location of
sound files and select an alert tone
Set Repeat
aCheck Repeat field to select
bUse s to highlight Time cycle field and
specify the time cycle unit
cHighlight Value field and enter a value
dHighlight Until date field and enter a year,
month, and day to stop repetition
Set Expiry time for a Calendar Event
Use s to highlight Expiry field and switch the
expiry limit
DPress w (Save)
Tip
• To make it easier to enter a Start date and/or End
date
Put cursor on the target date on Calendar window
before Step 2 to show that date in Start date or End date
field.
• When an event entry has expired
An event is automatically deleted from Calendar when
it expires. For example, if the expiration is set to After
1 year, and event repetition not set, the indication is
deleted when one year has elapsed from the ending
date of the event. With repetition set, it is deleted one
year after the ending date of the last repetition. To
deactivate automatic deletion, set the expiry to
Disable.
14-9
Tools
14
Anniversary/Holiday
Register a maximum of 50 anniversaries and 50
holidays.
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options →Add new →
Anniversary or Holiday
CSelect items and make settings
Set a text
aSelect Text entry field
bEnter text
Set a date
Highlight Date field and enter the date
Set an alarm (Anniversary only)
aCheck Alarm field to select
bHighlight Before field, enter an interval
before the anniversary Alarm time, use s
to highlight Unit field and switch to an
appropriate unit
cHighlight Alarm time field, and enter a time
dSelect Alert tone field, select the location of
sound of files and select an alert tone
Set to repeat every year
Check Repeat every year field
DPress w (Save)
Tip
• To make it easier to enter a date
Put cursor on the target date on Calendar window
before Step 2 to show that date in Date field.
14-10
Tools
14
Memo
Up to 20 memos can be registered. Memos can be
registered even while talking ( P.2-9, 6-6).
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options →Add new →Memo
CSelect the memo text box and enter
text
To set the date
Select Date and enter the date
DPress w (Save)
Tasks
Register a maximum of 100 time-limited items and
manage them in a list.
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options →Add new →Task
CSelect items and make settings
Set a title
aSelect Title field
bEnter title
Tip
• To make it easier to enter a date ( P.14-9)
14-11
Tools
14
Set a description of the task
aSelect Task field
bEnter text
To set the starting date
Highlight Start date field and enter the date
To set the due date
Highlight Due date field and enter the date
Set an alarm
aCheck Alarm field
bHighlight Before field, enter a value for how
long before the task starts the alarm should
sound, use s to highlight field of units and
select an appropriate unit
cHighlight Alarm time field and enter the time
dSelect Alert tone field, select the location of
sound files and select an alert tone
Set a priority level
Use s to highlight Priority field and select a
value
DPress w (Save)
Volume of Alarm sound
The volume follows the setting of Tone volume for
Voice calls; the setting of Voice call in Vibration for
Vibrator.
When the time set for Alarm comes
Alarm sounds and a message appears. To stop Alarm,
press any key. Press c to cancel the message display.
With no action to stop Alarm, a message appears
indicating Missed alarm event. Press w (View) to
view the message.
When a call is being initiated or during a call
During a call or connection (Connecting…appears),
708SC notifies with a short sound and indicator;
uncheck Alerts on call (in Phone sounds setting) to
Tip
• To make it easier to enter a Starting date or Due
date
Put cursor on the target date on Calendar window
before Step 2 to show that date in Starting date and
Due date field.
14-12
Tools
14
notify only by an indicator. When an outgoing call is
being Initiated (Dialing…appears), 708SC notifies only
by an indicator. Press c to clear an indicator.
Viewing Saved Calendar
Entries
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BOpen a window listing items
To check items of one day
Select a date on Monthly view window or
Weekly view window, or use s to change the
date on Daily view window
To check registered contents by type
Select Options →Event list and select a type
To check the message of a missed alarm
Select Options →Missed alarm event
CSelect and view details
Tip
14-13
Tools
14
Editing Calendar Entries
Editing and Saving as New Entries
In addition to edit and update the entries, edit the
entries and save them as new entries.
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BOpen a window listing entries
To open a window listing entries for a single
day
Select a date on Monthly view window or
Weekly view window, or use s to change the
date on Daily view window
To view events by type
Select Options →Event list and select a type
CSelect an item to edit
DPress c (Edit)
EChange the information as required
FPress w (Save) and select New or
Update
Marking a Task as Completed
APress c and select Tools →
Calendar
BSelect Options →Event list →Task
CHighlight a completed task, select
Options →Completed
To remove the completion mark
Select Options →To do
• To check calendar item status
Select Options in Calendar or registered contents list
and Memory status; check the number of savings by
type.
14-14
Tools
14
Deleting Calendar Entries
AIn Calendar window or saved
contents list, select Options →Delete
BDelete the entry
To delete only the highlighted entry
Select Selected →Yes
To delete all entries of the current month or
week
Select This month or This week →Yes
To delete only entries from a specific period
of time
aSelect Periods
bEnter the start and end dates
cPress c (Delete) and select Yes
Tip
• To sort tasks
In the Task window, select Options →Sort by and
select a sorting type. Classify tasks into completed/
uncompleted ones or sort them by due date or priority.
14-15
Tools
14
To delete all entries or all before the
highlighted date
aSelect All or All past data
bEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm)
and select Yes
Calendar Options
Perform the following operations from Options on a
window listing Calendar entries:
Tip
• To collectively delete multiple registered items
Select registered unnecessary items from a list by type
and delete them collectively.
aPress c and select Tools →Calendar
bSelect Options →Event list and select the type
cSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
dCheck the items to delete, press w (Delete) and
select Yes
Item Description
Add new Save a new Calendar entry ( P.14-7).
Send schedule/
Send task
Send Calendar entry via S! Mail
( P.17-6) or Bluetooth® ( P.12-6).
View mode Select a display mode ( P.14-7).
Go to
Display a particular month or week by
changing Monthly/Weekly view
window ( P.14-6).
Event list View events listed by type ( P.14-12).
Delete Delete a Calendar entry ( P.14-13).
Completed/To
do
Set or cancel the task completion mark
( P.14-12).
Sort by Sort tasks ( P.14-13).
Save to Data
Folder
Create a vFile and save it to Other
documents in Data Folder.
Settings Select Calendar Display settings
( P.14-6).
14-16
Tools
14
Voice Recorder
Voice Recorder can record voice of a maximum of 60
minutes. Voice Recorder can be started from the tool
menu, as well as during a call, Options of Data
Folder, or Message creation window. Voice recording
can be activated during a call.
Voice Recorder Window
Control Voice Recorder with Softkeys and
navigation key.
Missed alarm
event
View the message of a missed alarm
( P.14-12).
Print via
Bluetooth
Print highlighted schedule event or
task using the printer via Bluetooth®
connection.
Memory status Check memory usage for Calendar
functions ( P.14-12).
Item Description
Recording Window
Navigation key
Elapsed time
Remaining recording time
Playback Window
Navigation key
Elapsed time
Play time
14-17
Tools
14
Recording Voice
The recorded voice is saved to Sounds & Ringtones
Data Folder.
APress c and select Tools →Voice
recorder
To change the fixed recording time ( P.14-
17)
BPress c (Record)
CPress w (Stop) or continue
recording until the set time runs out
DAs required, press c (Play) to
replay
To pause
Press c (Pause)
To resume
Select Options →Record
To record voice from Options ( P.14-16)
14-18
Tools
14
Playing Voice
Replay a voice file saved in Data Folder.
APress c and select Tools →Voice
recorder
BSelect Options →My sounds
CHighlight the file and press c
(Play)
Voice Recorder Options
Operate listed below from Options before and after
recording. Options and selectable items vary by the
conditions. For more information about available
options after selecting My sounds, see "Data Folder
Options" ( P.11-14).
Changing Voice Recorder
Settings
Default Name
Item Description
Record Start recording.
My sounds Call up list of sound files saved in
the My sounds folder.
Send Send a file via S! Mail ( P.17-6) or
Bluetooth® (P.12-6).
Set as Set voice for ringtone, etc.
Delete Delete a recorded voice file.
Rename Change file name.
Lock/Unlock Set/release file protection.
Details Confirm recorded sound file size,
etc.
Record settings
Select the file name assigned
automatically or the fixed recording
time ( P.14-17).
Default
Setting
■Vo i c e
Item Description
14-19
Tools
14
The voice recorded with Voice recorder is saved
under a name such as "Voice 001." "Voice" can be
changed to another word.
APress c and select Tools →Voice
recorder
BSelect Options →Record settings →
Default name
CEnter a name
Recording Time
APress c and select Tools →Voice
recorder
BSelect Options →Record settings →
Recording time
CSelect a duration and press c
(Save)
World Clock
World clock allows you to check the current time all
over the world.
Viewing World Clock
APress c and select Tools →World
clock
Tip
• If the default name is changed
The naming rule is applied from the next recording.
Default
Setting
■5 minutes
14-20
Tools
14
Selecting Areas
When you save a second time zone, easily check the
time at that area looking at World clock.
APress c and select Tools →World
clock
BUse j to highlight area 1 and use
sto change city name
To set summer time
aPress o (DST)
bCheck the area to set summer time and press
w (Done)
CPress c (Save)
Current time and city name of
Current time and city name of
Default
Setting
■Tokyo, Seoul for both areas
14-21
Tools
14
Using Calculator
Arithmetic operations to a maximum of 13 digits can
be performed.
APress c and select Tools →
Calculator
BCalculate
To enter numbers
Press keys
To enter ＋,−,×, or ÷
Press r,l,u, or d
To display the calculation result
Press c
To enter ., (, or )
Press w (.( )) to toggle symbols
To move cursor left or right
Press * or #
To erase a symbol in a mathematical
expression
Place cursor after a symbol to erase and press
C
To erase both the mathematical expression
and the calculation result
Press C for 1+ seconds
Converting Currencies or
Units
Convert the currencies for various countries.
Alternatively, convert the units of length, weight, etc.
14-22
Tools
14
Converting Currencies
APress c and select Tools →
Converter →Currency
BSelect Original currency field and the
currency
To replace the original currency with the
target currency
Press o (Reverse)
CSelect Original currency amount field
and enter the amount
To enter a decimal point
Press *
DSelect Target currency field and the
currency
EView the result in the target currency
To check the exchange rate
aHighlight either of Currency fields and press
w (View Rate)
bPress C to return to the Original window
To change the exchange rate
aHighlight either of Currency fields and press
w (View Rate)
bSelect the base currency to change the rate,
highlight the currency, select Options →Edit
cEnter the rate and press c (Save)
Original currency
Enter the amount in original
Target currency
Converted amount appears
14-23
Tools
14
To add a currency unit
aPress w (View Rate)
bSelect Options →Add Rate
cEnter the currency unit/rate and press c
(Save)
Converting Units
APress c and select Tools →
Converter
BSelect Length,Weight,Volume,Area,
or Temperature
CSelect Original unit field and select
the unit
To replace the original unit with the target
unit
Press o (Reverse)
DHighlight Original unit value field
and enter the value
To enter a decimal point
Press *
To enter/delete "-" when converting
temperature
Press #
ESelect target Unit field and select the
unit
Original unit
Enter a value in original unit
Targ e t unit
The converted value appears
14-24
Tools
14
FView the result in Converted value
field
To clear the values
Press w (Clear)
Stopwatch
708SC can be used as a stopwatch for measuring a
maximum of ten lap times plus the total time.
APress c and select Tools →
Stopwatch
BPress c (Start)
CPress c (Lap) to measure a lap
time or w (Stop) to stop time
measurement
Dictionary
Look up English/Japanese dictionaries.
APress c and select Tools →
Dictionary
BSelect a dictionary
To use English dictionary
Select English dictionary
To use Japanese dictionary
Select Japanese dictionary
CEnter a word to search
DSelect a target word
14-25
Tools
14
Interpreter
Use 708SC Interpreter as a translator to find
frequently used phrases in particular places (such as
an airport), through voice prompts in each language.
Available languages are English, Korean, and
Chinese. Select place name or the phrases using keys
or your voice.
APress c and select Tools →
Interpreter
BSelect the language
CSelect an item
To set by your voice
Speak the item in menu to 708SC after the beep
To set by keys
Use a to highlight the item and press c
DSelect the phrase
To set by your voice
Speak the phrase for inquiry to 708SC after the
beep
To set by keys
Press w (メニュー ) to select the item
EHighlight the phrase and press c
To listen the phrase
Press w (音を聴く)
To listen the phrase again
Press w (リピート)
Tip
• To play voice prompts
After Step 3, press o (ボイスオン)
• When appears
708SC could not recognize your voice. Speak clearly
again or say another phrases.
もう一回言って下さい
14-26
Advanced Functions
15-2
Advanced Functions
15
Calling Functions
Auto Redial
Set to automatically disconnect a Voice/Video Call
initiated to a party that is busy and redial the same
party soon. Automatic redialing repeats up to 10
times until y is pressed or 708SC is closed.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings→All calls →Auto redial
BSelect a value and press c (Save)
International Dial
International Prefix
Set the international code frequently used when
initiating an international phone call.
APress c and select Settings→Call
settings →Voice call →International
dial→ Int'l prefix
BEnter an international code
Default
Setting
■Off
Tip
• When Retry with is set for Video Call
Automatic redialing settings take priority.
• When receiver has activated Voice Mail or Call
Forwarding
The call is forwarded and automatic redialing is
canceled.
Default
Setting
■ 010
15-3
Advanced Functions
15
Editing Country Codes
Add a country code or delete an unnecessary one.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice call →International
dial →Country codes
BPerform operations to add, change,
or delete
To add or change
aHighlight the item to add or change and press
c (Change)
bSelect Country name field and enter the
country name
cHighlight Country code, enter code and press
w (Save)
To delete
Highlight item to delete, press w (Delete) and
select Yes
Earphone call
When Earphone call is set to On, press switch for 1+
seconds to call specified number.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice call →Earphone call
Default
Setting
■1: Japan 2: KOR 3: GBR 4: ITA 5:
CHE
6: ESP 7: DEU 8: PRT 9: NLD 10:
FRA
11: MCO 12: USA 13: SWE 14: AUS
15: CHN 16: HKG 17: TWN
18 to 20: Unused
Default
Setting
■ Earphone call activate: Off
■ Call number: No list
15-4
Advanced Functions
15
BSelect Earphone call activate
CSelect the setting
DHighlight Call number and perform
operations to save phone number
To enter a phone number directly
aPress c (Select) and select Direct input
bEnter phone number
To select a phone number from Phonebook
aPress c (Select) and select Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
cHighlight phone number and press c
(Select)
To enter a phone number using Call Log
aPress c (Select) and select Call log
bSelect the log record
EPress w (Save)
Tip
• To delete a phone number
aPerform Step 1
bPress c (Select) and select Direct input
cPress C for 1+ seconds press c
• To change a phone number
aPerform Step 1
bPerform Step 4
cPress c (Save)
15-5
Advanced Functions
15
Handling Incoming Calls
Anykey Answer
Answer Voice Calls using keys other than c
(Accept) or t.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →Anykey answer
BSelect On or Off and press c (Save)
Acoustic Shock
To avoid 708SC starts to ring at high volume, even
when high Ringtone volume for Voice Call/Video
Call is set, Acoustic shock enables 708SC starts to
ring at Level 1 volume for the first two seconds, then
at the set volume.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →All calls →Acoustic shock
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■Off
Tip
• Answering a Voice Call when On is set ( P.2-3)
Default
Setting
■On
15-6
Advanced Functions
15
Active Folder
When On, open 708SC to answer an incoming call.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →Active folder
BSelect On or Off and press c (Save)
Side Key Silence/Reject
Use n or b to mute ringer or reject an incoming
call. Select from Reject (disconnect the call) or
Silence (silence the incoming tone).
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →Side key
BSelect a value and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■Off
Default
Setting
■Silence
15-7
Advanced Functions
15
Side Key Lock
With this function set to On, Side Keys of 708SC are
locked. Avoid accidental key presses when 708SC is
placed inside a bag, etc.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →Side key lock
BSelect On or Off and press c (Save)
Simple Search Setting
When Simple search is set to On, enter numbers in
Standby to search Phonebook entries starting with
Reading name corresponding each number. Then
search result (entry names and phone numbers) list
appears.
APress c and select Settings →
Phone settings →Simple search
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■Off
Tip
• To initiate calls using Simple search ( P.5-11)
15-8
Advanced Functions
15
Idle Shortcuts
Up to nine frequently used functions can be saved;
create own Shortcut Menu. In Standby, press u to
access functions saved to shortcuts.
APress u
BHighlight unsaved function entry box
and press c (Assign)
CSelect the function
DRepeat Steps 2 and 3 to save the
function
Tip
• To change functions
aIn Step 2, Highlight the function, select Options →
Assign
bSelect Yes and select the function
• To sort functions
aIn Step 2, Highlight the function, select Options →
Change Order
bUse a to highlight the target function box and
press c (Select)
• To delete functions
In Step 2, Highlight the function, select Options →
Delete →Yes
• To restore defaults
In Step 2, Highlight the function, select Options →
Reset →Yes
15-9
Advanced Functions
15
Memory Status
Check the following information:
• Available shared memory
• Status of SMS and S! Mail mailboxes
• Status of memory in Data Folder
• Status of Calendar items registered
• Status of Phonebooks (Handset and USIM Card)
Alternatively, delete saved entries and/or files.
APress c and select Settings →
Memory settings →Memory status
BSelect an item to check
Tip
• To delete the contents
When the contents in Data Folder, Calendar or
Phonebook are to be deleted
aPerform Steps 1 and 2
bHighlight an item, press c (Select), select Yes
and view an entry
cCheck the fields to delete, press w (Delete) and
select Yes
• To delete all contents
After Step c in "To delete the contents," enter Phone
Password, press c (Confirm) and select Yes
• To check/uncheck all contents at once
After Step c in "To delete the contents," select
Options →Mark all or Unmark all
• When the checked contents contain the contents
that functions or locks are set in
After Step c in "To delete the contents" or the "To
delete all contents" operations, the confirmation
window appears. If you select Yes, the deletion is
performed. If you select No, only files without
functions or locks set are deleted.
15-10
Optional Services
16-2
Optional Services
16
Optional Services
The following optional services are available with
708SC: * This service requires a separate subscription.
Service Description
Call
Forwarding
When you know you will be unable to
answer calls to 708SC, automatically
divert calls to a specified number.
Voice Mail
Divert all or all unanswered calls to Voice
Mail Center; access caller messages via
708SC from within the service area or via
a touchtone phone anywhere.
Call Waiting*
A tone sounds for incoming calls when
the line is engaged.
Put the line on hold to answer or alternate
between lines.
Conference
Call*
Open another line while one is engaged;
toggle lines or talk on all simultaneously.
Add new parties to an existing
conference; talk on up to five lines
simultaneously.
Call Barring Restrict incoming or outgoing calls by
condition.
Caller
Identification
Show or hide your own number when
placing calls.
Note
• When Out appears, access services from a
touchtone landline. For details, contact Customer
Service ( P.25-25).
Service Description
16-3
Optional Services
16
Call Forwarding
Set forwarding condition and number, by call type
(Voice Call or Video Call), beforehand, to divert
incoming calls to a specified number.
Activating Call Forwarding
Specify a forwarding number beforehand.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice call or Video call →
Diverts
BSelect No reply or Always; view the
current settings
When the settings are acceptable
After viewing, press l to return to the
previous window
Forwarding
Condition Description
No reply
Unanswered calls are diverted after the
specified ring time, or when the line is
busy or 708SC is out-of-range.
Always
708SC does not ring/vibrate for incoming
calls; calls are diverted automatically and
Missed Call does not appear.
Note
• Call Forwarding and Voice Mail cannot be used at
the same time.
• Activating Call Forwarding cancels Voice Mail.
• Call Forwarding is not available when All outgoing
calls or All incoming calls in Call Barring is active
(Call Barring takes priority over Call Forwarding).
16-4
Optional Services
16
CHighlight Forwarding address field
and enter a number
To select a phone number from Phonebook
aHighlight forwarding Address field and
select Options →Phonebook
bSelect Phonebook, highlight a phone number
and press c (Select)
DFor No reply, highlight Waiting time
field and set a time
EPress c (ON)
Cancel All
Cancel all Diverts services at once.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice call or Video call →
Diverts →Cancel all
Check Status
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice call or Video call →
Diverts →Check status
Tip
• When Call Forwarding (No reply) is active
While 708SC rings/vibrates, answer a call or press o
(Busy) to forward it.
Tip
• To stop Call Transfer service for each forwarding
condition
aPress c and select Settings →Call Settings →
Voice call or Video call →Diverts
bSelect No reply or Always
cPress w (OFF)
16-5
Optional Services
16
Voice Mail
Forward an incoming Voice Call to Voice Mail
Center or a specified number based on preset
forwarding conditions ( P.16-3).
Activating Voice Mail
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice mail
BSelect No reply or Always
CFor No reply, highlight Waiting time
field and set a time
DPress c (ON)
Note
• Voice Mail and Call Forwarding cannot be active at
the same time.
• Activating Voice Mail cancels Call Forwarding.
• Voice Mail is not available when All outgoing calls
or All incoming calls in Call Barring is active (Call
Barring takes priority over Voice Mail). Tip
• When Voice Mail (No reply) is active
While 708SC rings/vibrates, answer a call or press o
(Busy) to forward it.
16-6
Optional Services
16
Canceling Voice Mail
Cancel all Voice mail services at once.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice mail →Cancel all
Checking Settings
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice mail →Check status
Listening to Messages
When a caller saves a message at Voice Mail Center,
in standby, a message appears. Also, appears at
the top of Display.
While Message Appears
Connect to Voice Mail Center as described below
and follow voice prompts.
APress w (Dial)
To check message details
Press c while message appears
Tip
• To cancel Voice Mail by forwarding condition
aPress c and select Settings →Call settings →
Voice mail
bSelect No reply or Always
cPress w (OFF)
１２ １5 １5 30
Notification
16-7
Optional Services
16
While No Message Appears
AEnter 1416 and press t
Incoming Call Notification
If there was a call that could not be answered because
you were out of service area or handset was powered
off, it is notified with SMS. It is also notified when a
caller saves a message at Voice Mail Center while
you are talking to other party.
Incoming Call Notification
AEnter 1414 and press t (Free of
charge)
When setting from a general subscriber
phone in Japan (Free of charge)
Dial 090-665-1414 and press t
When setting in overseas (Charged)
Press 0 for 1+ seconds, enter +, enter 81-
90-665-14191 and press t
BPerform operations following the
audio prompts
Tip
• To access caller message from overseas
aPress 0 for 1+ seconds and enter +
bEnter 819066514170 and press t
• To delete a message without listening to it
Press o (End).
• To clear
Voice Mail indicator disappears when messages are
accessed via 708SC.
16-8
Optional Services
16
Call Waiting*
* A separate subscription is required to use this
service.
This service is only available for Voice Calls.
Activating or Canceling
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Voice call →Call waiting
BActivate or cancel the service
To activate
Press c (ON)
To cancel
Press w (OFF)
Receiving a Second Call
When there is an incoming call during a call, you are
notified with a specific interrupt sound and display.
Place the current call on hold and answer the second
call.
AWhen you hear the interrupt sound,
press c (Accept)
BSelect Hold active call
To end the current call and answer the
second call
Select End active call
CPress w (Swap) to toggle the calls
DTo end the current call, press y
To end the call on hold
Select Options →End →Held call
16-9
Optional Services
16
To end both calls at once
Select Options →End →All calls, or close
708SC
Conference Call*
* A separate subscription is required to use this
service.
Talk with a maximum of six parties simultaneously.
New Call
When the called party is connected, the party that has
been connected is placed on hold.
ADuring a call, select Options →New
call and enter number
To use Phonebook
aPress c (Search) and select Phonebook
bHighlight the phone number and press
c (Select)
To use a log
Press t, open logs and highlight the entry
BPress c (Call) and talk with the
connected party
Tip
• When the other party ends the call and you have
another call waiting
Press w (Retrieve) to talk to the waiting party.
• When the Call Transfer service or Voice Mail
service is active
When the second call is not answered, it is forwarded
to a forwarding destination or Voice Mail Center.
When the forwarding condition is set to Always, the
Call Waiting service is not available.
16-10
Optional Services
16
Engaged Conference Call
Operations
ACall another party during a call
( P.16-9)
BPress w (Swap) to switch connected
calls
Join
ADuring a call, initiate a call to
another party ( P.16-9)
BSelect Options →Join
Tip
• To end the call on hold
During a call, select Options →End →Held call
• To end all calls
During a call, select Options →End →All calls, or
close 708SC
• When the current caller ends the call while using
Conference Call service
A party on hold remains on-hold state. Switch to the
on-hold party to talk.
Tip
• To call with only one person
During a call, select Options →Split and select a caller
to talk to
• To end the call for a specific caller
During a call, select Options →End →Select
participant, check callers to end and press w (End)
• To end the all calls
During a call, press y
• When one party ends the call during Conference
Call
Continue talking with remaining parties.
16-11
Optional Services
16
Call Barring
Use this service to bar outgoing/incoming calls for
Voice/Video Calls, sending/receiving SMS under the
conditions listed below.
When setting restrictions, you are required to enter
Network Password (The 4-digit number dedicated to
Outgoing/incoming service specified at the
subscription).
Item Description
Restrict
outgoing
calls
All outgoing
calls
Deactivates initiating calls
and SMS sending, except
emergency calls.
Outgoing Intl
calls
Deactivates initiating
international calls and SMS
sending within your current
location.
Intl except
home
Deactivates initiating
international calls and SMS
sending within your current
location or except Japan.
Restrict
incoming
calls
All incoming
calls
Deactivates reception of all
calls and SMS receiving.
Incoming
when
roaming
Deactivates reception of all
calls and SMS receiving
while outside of Japan.
Note
• If incorrect Network Password is entered three
consecutive times, setting or canceling the Call
Barring service is deactivated. Note that, in this
case, change Network Password and Center Access
code. For more information, contact Customer
Service ( P.25-25).
• When the Call Transfer service or Voice Mail
service is active, you cannot use All outgoing calls or
All incoming calls (Call Transfer service or Voice
Mail service takes priority).
16-12
Optional Services
16
Restrict Outgoing/Incoming
Calls
Restrict outgoing calls and/or Restrict incoming calls
for each type of call (Voice/Video Calls, SMS)/
transmission.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Call barring
BSelect Voice call,Video call, or SMS
and select a restriction type
CEnter Network Password
DSet or cancel call barring
To se t
Press c (ON)
To cancel
Press w (OFF)
Cancel All
Canceling outgoing and incoming call is available
for each of call types (Voice and Video Calls, SMS)/
transmission.
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Call barring
Tip
• When an attempt is made to initiate a call while
calls are restricted
A message appears indicating that outgoing call
restriction is active. The message may appear after a
while depending on the area where using 708SC.
Tip
• To check settings
Perform Steps 1 and 2. After checking the settings,
press C to return to the previous window.
16-13
Optional Services
16
BSelect Voice call,Video call, or SMS
→Cancel all
CEnter Network Password and press
c
Changing Network Password
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →Call barring → Change
password
BEnter the current Network Password
in Old field and new Network
Password
(4 digits) in New and Cnf (Confirm)
field, then press c (Confirm)
Caller ID
Show or hide your own phone number when calling
from 708SC.
Show My Number
APress c and select Settings →Call
settings →All calls →Show my
number
BSelect the setting and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■By network
Tip
• When set to By network
Automatically set to Show/Hide your number by
current network status.
16-14
Optional Services
16
Adding 186 or 184
Use 186 (Show ID) or 184 (Hide ID) prefixes to
show or hide your number when calling from 708SC,
regardless of the Show my number setting.
AEnter Show ID or Hide ID Prefix
To show Caller ID
Press 186
To hide Caller ID
Press 184
BEnter phone number
CPress t
To initiate a Video Call
Select Options →Video call
Receiving & Sending Messages
17-2
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Getting Started
S! Mail
Use this service to send/receive long text messages,
images, videos, other files, and sounds between S!
Mail compatible SoftBank handsets and PCs via e-
mail.
A separate subscription is required to use S! Mail and
receive e-mail.
SMS
Use this service to send/receive short text messages
between SMS-compatible SoftBank handsets using
phone numbers.
Checking for New
Messages
When a message is received in Standby mode,
reception notification appears. The number of
received messages, senders and reception dates/times
appear.
Tip
• Retry function
If the other party's handset cannot receive a message
because the power turned off or out-of-range, 708SC
keeps the message saved on Mail Server; then send to
the other party after signal reception recovers stable.
Reception Notification Window
相田名都
１２ １5 １5 30
Number of received messages
Sender
Reception date and time
17-3
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
APress w (View)
When multiple messages appear
Use s to select the tab and press w
(View)
BSelect a new received message
Operations in SMS window
In SMS window, press Side Keys nb to enlarge/
reduce text font size. Alternatively, press u or d
Received Message List
SMS Window
２００６
年
１２
月
１５
日
１８：１５
：相田名都
Ｆｒｏｍ
会議の場所と時間が決ま
りましたのでお知らせし
ます。
場所：
５
階第
３
会議室
時間：
１４：００
S! Mail Text
Tip
• When a message is received (out of Standby mode)
or appears on the top of Display. When 708SC is
closed, an icon like appears on Sub Display ( P.1-
10,
1-12). The icon does not appear with Sub LCD light
( P.8-9) set to Off.
• Received message count
When there are unread messages, the total number of
new and unread messages appears.
• Sender information
A phone number or mail address appears. When the
sender has been saved in Phonebook, you will see the
name saved in Phonebook. When an incoming image
has been saved in Phonebook or an incoming image
has been set for the group, the image appears at the
same time. While Secret Mode is set to Hide and
Phonebook Secret Mode is set to On for message
receiver/sender information; sender's name/image does
not appear.
17-4
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
for 1+ seconds to auto scroll. To stop auto scroll, press
any key. Press r or l to adjust the scroll speed.
3D Pictogram ( P.20-5)
By default, when you check an incoming/unread
message (Except S! Mail that is set for Slide Show or
with an attachment), the message text appears in 3D
Pictogram. After 3D Pictogram display ends or w
(Stop) is pressed, Message window appears. Perform
various operations after Message window appears.
Retrieving Complete Messages
When Home network ( P.20-3) or Roaming ( P.20-
3) is set to Manual, S! Mail is temporarily stored on
Mail Server; part of the received message is sent to
708SC as a reception notification. Retrieve complete
messages from Mail Server.
APress w and select Received msgs
17-5
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
BSelect a message with the rest of it
CPress c (Retrieve)
DSelect complete message Message window for S! Mail with an
attachment
The first page shows the file name for the attachment
and the second and subsequent pages show the message.
Use r to read the message or select Options →Play
to start Slide Show.
Message window for S! Mail with Slide Show
set
Select Options →Play to play the slide. During
playing, press c (Pause)/w (Stop) to pause/stop it.
Use s to manually select pages.
Notification Details
日付
：
2006
年
１２
月
１５
日
15
：
00
Ｆｒｏｍ：
090XXXXXXXX
本文
：
家に新しい家族が加わりま
した。ご紹介します。
受信
Message Window
Tip
• Received Message list window indicators
: Unread reception notification (Priority: High)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: Standard)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: Low)
: Read reception notification (Priority: High)
: Read reception notification (Priority: Standard)
: Read reception notification (Priority: Low)
• To retrieve complete messages from Message list
window ( P.19-2)
17-6
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Message window for S! Mail with an inserted
file ( P.17-17, 17-18)
If an image is inserted, the image appears with the
message.
If sound is inserted, select Options →Play to play
sound.
If Slide Show is set, sound is played when the page with
an inserted sound appears.
If video is inserted, select Options →Play and press
o (Video) to play video.
If Slide Show is set, Video appears at the lower right
and pressing o (Video) plays sound when the page
with an inserted video appears.
Message window with a file requiring
purchasing/obtaining Content Key
appears on a page with an inserted file that you
cannot view/play.
Select Options →Download content key to view/play
the file.
Using Received Messages
Send a message directly to the sender.
APress w (Reply) on the Message
window
BCreate a message and press w
(Send)
Creating Messages
Two types of messages are available on 708SC: S!
Mail and SMS. The number of characters that can be
sent and entry items are different between these types
(Shown below).
Tip
• Subject display of S! Mail for replies
The subject of a replied S! Mail is prefixed with "RE:"
automatically.
17-7
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Yes: Available
No: Not available
1 The number of characters that can be sent varies by the
attachment size, etc.
2 Set a maximum of 20 slides in one message.
3 Total size of all kinds of messages (Including address,
subject, text, and attachments).
Using the Mail Art Function
When displaying an S! Mail window, use mail art
function to display text messages and/or images
consecutively like slides or with a background color
( P.17-12, 17-15, 17-18).
S! Mail SMS
Number of
characters that
can be sent
Approximately
10,000 single-
byte/double-byte
characters1
Approximately
10,000 characters
in one slide2
(Up to 300K
bytes3)
Maximum of 70
single- byte/
double-byte,
Katakana
characters
Maximum of 160
single-byte
alphanumerics
(Up to 140 bytes)
Entr
y
item
Address Yes Yes
Subject Yes No
Attachme
nt
Yes N o
17-8
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Procedures
Mails should be created in the flow as shown below.
Items other than Destination should be entered as
required.
Automatic Change of Message Type
When message creation is started, the message type is
set to SMS; it automatically changes to S! Mail when
one of the following occurs:
• Entering mail address as a destination
• Entering a subject
• Entering characters exceeding the number of
characters that can be sent by SMS
• Inserting files on Slide Show page
• Attaching or inserting a file
• Changing the address type to Cc or Bcc
When the message is modified to allow it to be sent as
SMS, for example, by deleting an attached or inserted
file or a subject, the message type automatically
changes to SMS.
Depending on message creation conditions, it may not
automatically change type. If the mail type is not
changed automatically, change it manually ( P.17-12).
Creating S! Mail Creating SMS
Enter an address ( P.17-8)
Enter message text ( P.17-11)
Enter a subject ( P.17-11)
Attach/Insert files
( P.17-15, 17-18)
Set any sending options ( P.17-12)
Send the message ( P.17-12)
Tip
• To set sending options beforehand ( P.20-2, 20-5)
17-9
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Address
Enter a phone number or mail address for S! Mail or
a phone number for SMS as a message address. Up
to twenty addresses can be entered.
APress w and select Create msg
BEnter an address
To select an address from Phonebook
aSelect Address field and select From
Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
cHighlight a phone number or mail address
and press c (Select)
To enter an address directly
aSelect Address field and select Enter
Recipient
bEnter phone number or mail address
To select an address from sent records
Select Address field and select the record
To select an address from a Phonebook
Category
aSelect Address field and select From
Category
Message Creation Window
Address field
Subject field
Message field
Text entry field
Attach field
17-10
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
bSelect a Category, with/without Address
selection window, highlight an address to
enter and press c (Select)
CTo enter another address
To enter an address directly
aSelect Address field
bSelect Entry field and select Enter Recipient
cEnter phone number or mail address and
press w (Done)
To select an address from Phonebook
aSelect Options →Add recipients →
Phonebook
bSearch and select Phonebook
cHighlight a phone number or mail address
and press c (Select)
To select an address from a Phonebook
Category
aSelect Options →Add recipients →
Category
bSelect a Category; with/without Address
selection window, highlight an Address to
enter and press c (Select)
17-11
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Tip
• To create a message using a template ( P.17-14)
• To confirm the entered address
In Step 3, select Options →Recipient list
• To add an address after confirming the entered
address
aIn Step 3, select Options →View recipient list
bSelect Entry field and perform operation in the
same way as Step 2
cPress w (Done)
• To send a message after confirming the entered
address
aIn Step 3, select Options →View recipient list
bSelect Options →Send
• To change the address type to To, Cc, or Bcc
aIn Step 3, select Options →View recipient list
bSelect Options, highlight an address →Change
recipients →To,Cc, or Bcc
• To delete an address
aIn Step 3, select Options →view recipient list
bSelect Options, highlight an address →Remove
• To copy, cut, or paste characters ( P.4-13)
• Displaying Address field
When multiple addresses have been saved, and the
number of addresses appear in Address field on
Message creation window.
Note
• If the free space of the shared memory ( P.25-15)
on 708SC is less than 464K bytes, you cannot create
a message. To create a message, delete unnecessary
messages.
• If the shared memory ( P.25-15) becomes low
while in a message creation, you may not be able to
save the message in Drafts.
• A message created on 708SC may not appear the
same way on the other party's phone.
• Message sent with Subject/Text in Hangul, may
appear as spaces or be deleted on the other party's
phone.
17-12
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Subject
AIn Message creation window, select
Subject field
BEnter a subject
Message
AIn Message creation window, select
Message field
When Slide Show is set ( P.17-12)
Select Text entry field
BEnter the message
Tip
• To copy, cut, or paste characters ( P.4-13)
• To set/release the prediction entry function
( P.4-14)
Tip
• To copy, cut, or paste characters ( P.4-13)
• To use an SMS template or Phonebook entry
( P.4-11)
• To change the font size of characters being entered
In Step 2, select Options →Font Size →Small,
Standard, or Large
• To set/release the prediction entry function
( P.4-14)
• To set Slide Show ( P.17-12)
• To insert image files, etc. in a Message field
( P.17-15, 17-18)
• To view the text in 3D Pictogram
In Message creation window, highlight Message field,
select Options →3D Pict.Disp.
17-13
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Sending a Message
AIn Message creation window, press
w (Send)
Slide Show
Display S! Mail window in Slide Show. Text
messages, images, movies, and sounds can be
inserted on each page of Slide Show. Set a maximum
of 20 slide pages in one message.
AIn Message creation window, select
Options →Insert →Text
BSelect added Text entry field and
enter a message
CTo add a Text entry field for Slide
Show, perform Steps 1 and 2
Tip
• To set sending settings for a message being created
aIn Message creation window, select Options →
Sending options
bSelect an item and make settings ( P.20-2, 20-5)
cPress w (Apply) or w (Save)
• To change the message type
aIn Message creation window, highlight all fields
except Address field
bSelect Options →Change to S! Mail or Change to
SMS →Yes
Message Creation Window
Slide page No. and display
time
メール
作成
Added Text entry field
17-14
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Changing the Style of Message
Field
Set the font color, font style, interval time for
displaying Slide Show, background color, etc.
AIn Message creation window,
highlight Message field
BSet options as required
To set background color
aSelect Options →Edit style
bHighlight Select page and use s to display
All pages
cHighlight Background colour and use a to
highlight a color
Set the page display
aHighlight a Character entry field to set
bSelect Options →Edit style
cHighlight Slide interval and enter a time
Set the font color
aSelect Options →Edit style
bHighlight Select page and use s to display
All pages
cHighlight Font colour and use a to
highlight a color
Tip
• To insert Image,Sound, or Video
Perform operations in "Inserting a File" ( P.17-17).
Alternatively, other files can be inserted in the same
page. But image/video or sound/video cannot be
displayed in the same page.
• To delete a Text entry field
aIn Message creation window, highlight Text entry
field
bSelect Options →Remove →Yes
• To preview Slide Show before sending
aIn Message creation window, highlight a field other
than Address field
bSelect Options →Preview
cSelect Options →Play
17-15
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Set a font color for a single slide page
aHighlight a Character entry field to set
bSelect Options →Edit style
cHighlight Font colour and use a to
highlight a color
Set font size for all pages
aSelect Options →Edit style
bHighlight Select page and use s to display
All pages
cHighlight Font Size and use s to display a
size
To set font size for a single slide page
aHighlight a Character entry field to set
bSelect Options →Edit style
cHighlight Font Size and use s to display a
size
To change the display order for text and
images (Videos)
aSelect Options →Edit style
bHighlight Select page and use s to display
All pages
cHighlight Order item and use s to display
Text-Top or Image (Video)
CPress c (Save)
Tem plate s
Create and send a message using S! Mail or SMS
template.
Tip
• To preview the style before sending
aIn Message creation window, highlight a field other
than Address field
bSelect Options → Preview
cSelect Options → Play
Note
• If the type of message being created is SMS, Edit
style or Preview does not appear in Options.
17-16
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
APress w and select Templates →
S! Mail templates or SMS templates
BHighlight an S! Mail or SMS
template
CSelect Options →Send
DCreate a message and press w (Send)
Attaching/Inserting Files
A file that can be attached/inserted to an S! Mail is
limited in size to 294K bytes (except the message
address, subject and message text size). Up to 20
files can be attached to one S! Mail.
Tip
• To use after viewing an S! Mail template
aPerform Steps 1 and 2
bSelect Options →View
cSelect Options →Play as required
dSelect Options →Edit and send
• To register a template ( P.4-16, 18-19)
17-17
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Attaching/Inserting a File from
Data Folder, etc. into Message
Field
Attach images, video, and/or sounds saved in Data
Folder to a message, as well as any contents saved in
Phonebook and Calendar (converted as vCard format
or vCalendar format). If you insert a file in Message
field, display/play the file when you view the
Message window.
Attaching a File
AIn Message creation window, Select
Attach field
BPerform operations to attach
To attach file
aSelect Data Folder
bSelect a file from Data Folder
To attach Phonebook data as vCard file
format
aSelect Phonebook details
Tip
• To check the size of a message being created
Select S! Mail as the Type of the message, the message
size appears in the upper-right corner.
Note
• Note that some recipients may not be able to receive
attachment or inserted files.
• Video files that cannot be sent by S! Mail (File size:
over 294K bytes, Size: over 176 x 144, Quality: other
than Economy, or etc.) are attached/inserted, the
message indicating attaching/inserting failed
appears.
Message Creation Window
(File Attached)
Attach field
Attachment name
17-18
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
cPress w (Add)
To attach Calendar items as vCard file
format
aSelect Calendar item
bSelect the items
Inserting a File
AIn Message creation window, select
Options →Insert
To insert a file with Slide Show set ( P.17-12)
aIn Message creation window, highlight Text
entry field to insert a file
bSelect Options →Insert
Tip
• To add a file
Perform Step 1 to 2 in "Attaching a file" ( P.17-16)
• To check an attachment
aIn Message creation window, highlight a file in
Attach field and select Options →View attachment
bSelect a file
• If you attach a file
An icon indicating the file type and the file name is
displayed in Attach field.
: Image : Sound
: Video : vCalendar
: vCard : File other than above
• To replace a file
aIn Message creation window, highlight a file in
Attach field and select Options →View attachment
bHighlight a file and select Options →Replace
cPerform Step 2 in "Attaching a file" ( P.17-16)
• To delete a file
aIn Message creation window, highlight a file in
Attach field and select Options →View attachment
bHighlight a file and select Options →Remove →
Selected
• To delete all files
aIn Message creation window, highlight a file in
Attach field and select Options →View attachment
bSelect Options →Remove →All →Yes
17-19
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
BSelect the file to insert
To insert an image
aSelect Image
bSelect an image from Data Folder
To insert sound
aSelect Sound
bSelect sound from Data Folder
To insert a video
aSelect Video
bSelect movie from Data Folder
Message Creation Window
(File Inserted)
Inserted file name
Tip
• To preview an inserted file
aSelect Options →Preview
bSelect Options →Play
• If you insert a file
In Message creation window, the icon indicating the
file type, file name, and file size is displayed in Text
entry field. If you inserted an image with no
restrictions on its being displayed, the image will be
shown in reduced size instead of the icon.
: Images that cannot be displayed because of
Content Key has not been purchased or otherwise
obtained
: Sound
: Video
• To replace a file
aIn Message creation window, highlight a file in Text
entry field
bSelect Options →Replace
cSelect a file, an entry, or a calendar item
• To delete a file
aIn Message creation window, highlight a file in Text
entry field
bSelect Options →Remove →Yes
17-20
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Creating & Inserting a File
While creating a message, create a file and insert it.
The file inserted to Message field is displayed/played
when Message window is opened.
AIn Message creation window, select
Options →Create & Insert
To insert a file with Slide Show is set
aIn Message creation window, highlight Text
entry field where a file to be inserted
bSelect Options →Create & Insert
BSelect a creation method and insert
the file
To capture a photograph
aSelect Take picture
bPress c (Take)
cPress c (Add)
To record video
aSelect Record video
bPress c (Record)
cPress c (Save)
dSelect Options →Add to message
To record sound
aSelect Record sound
bPress c (Record)
cPress w (Stop)
dSelect Options →Add to message
• To insert a file where another file has already been
inserted
A new Slide Show page is added automatically and the
file is inserted. In case of an image file and sound file,
both can be inserted on the same page.
17-21
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Saving Created Messages
Save to Drafts
When temporarily stopping message creation to
perform other operations, save the message being
created to the Drafts.
AIn Message creation window, select
Options →Save to Drafts
Tip
• If you insert a file
708SC works the same way as the file inserted from
Data Folder to Text entry field ( P.17-18).
• To insert a file where another file has already been
inserted
708SC works the same way as the file inserted from
Data Folder to Text entry field ( P.17-18).
• To replace or delete a file
Perform operations the same way as the file inserted
from Data Folder to Text entry field ( P.17-18).
• Operations activated before and after capturing a
still image ( P.7-6)
• Operations activated before and after recording
video ( P.7-11)
• Operations activated before and after recording
sound ( P.14-18)
Tip
• When C / y / l is pressed on Message
creation window
When C,y, or l is pressed after entering
something or attaching or inserting a file, a message
appears asking whether to finish creating the message.
Select Yes to save the created message to Drafts.
17-22
Receiving & Sending Messages
17
Save as a Template
By saving a message with fixed contents, etc. as an
S! Mail templates, new S! Mail can be easily created
and sent.
AIn Message creation window,
highlight Attach field or Text entry
field
BSelect Options →Save as template
Note
• Only when any of addresses, subject, and text is
entered or a file is attached/inserted, Save to Drafts
appears in Options.
Note
•Saved as template appears in Options only when a
subject is entered or the message is longer than
SMS, or when a file is inserted.
Messaging Folders
18-2
Messaging Folders
18
Viewing Messages
Five mailboxes are created on 708SC.
Message Lists
From list of Received msgs or Unsent msgs, view the
messages.
APress w
BSelect Received msgs or Unsent msgs
Mailbox Message type
Received msgs Received messages.
Drafts Message drafts saved before
completion.
Unsent msgs Messages unsent because of failure or
cancellation, or waiting to be sent.
Sent msgs Messages already sent.
Templates S! Mail or SMS saved as templates.
Tip
• To check message memory status
aPress w
bSelect Memory status
cSelect SMS,S! Mail (By count), or S! Mail (By size)
• To create a personal folder in Received msgs
( P.18-15)
Note
• When adding a new SMS to Drafts, Unsent msgs, or
Sent msgs cause the maximum number of allowed
message to be exceeded, the oldest SMS is deleted
automatically.
Received Message List
18-3
Messaging Folders
18
To check from a personal folder in Received
msgs
Select a folder; then Phone Password entry window
appears, enter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm)
CSelect a message
Message List Window
The following information appears in lists for each
Messaging folder.
Tip
• In Message window, press * or #
Switch between previous and next window.
• When pressing Side Keys nb in SMS window
Press Side Key n to enlarge font size by two levels;
press Side Key b to reduce font size by two levels
• To view a sent message
aIn Step 2, select Sent msgs
bHighlight a message, select Options →View
• To view S! Mail details
In Step 3, highlight a message, select Options →
Details
Received Message List
Message type icon
Information icon of copyrighted file
Sender or recipient
Reception date
Subject or the top of the message
Message size
18-4
Messaging Folders
18
Tip
• Received Message Indicators
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: High)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: Standard)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: Low)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: High; Video and/or
sound inserted)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: Standard; Video and/or
sound inserted)
: Unread S! Mail (Priority: Low; Video and/or
sound inserted)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: High)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: Standard)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: Low)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: High; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: Standard; Video and/or
sound inserted)
: Read S! Mail (Priority: Low; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: High)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: Standard)
: Unread reception notification (Priority: Low)
: Read reception notification (Priority: High)
: Read reception notification (Priority: Standard)
: Read reception notification (Priority: Low)
: Unread SMS
: Read SMS
: Unread SMS (saved in USIM Card)
: Read SMS (saved in USIM Card)
: Unread S! Mail Delivery Report
: Read S! Mail Delivery Report
: Unread SMS Delivery Report
: Read SMS Delivery Report
: Receiving S! Mail
• Draft Message Indicators
: S! Mail (Priority: High)
: S! Mail (Priority: Standard)
: S! Mail (Priority: Low)
: S! Mail (Priority: High; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: S! Mail (Priority: Standard; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: S! Mail (Priority: Low; Video and/or sound
inserted)
: SMS
18-5
Messaging Folders
18
Message Window Operations
Saving to Phonebook
Save the phone number/mail address of the sender/
recipient to Phonebook while displaying Message
window (Received)/Reception notification window.
AIn Message window, select Options →
Add to Phonebook →Phone or USIM
BSelect New or Update
To save as a new entry
Select New
To save to an existing entry
aSelect Update
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
CSelect an icon
DSave other items ( P.5-4)
• Unsent Message Indicators
: S! Mail
: S! Mail (Video and/or sound inserted)
: SMS
: Sending S! Mail
• Sent Message Indicators
: S! Mail
: S! Mail (Video and/or sound inserted)
: SMS
: SMS (saved in USIM Card)
• Copyrighted file indicators
Attached/inserted copyrighted file indicators
: Transferable, Content Key has already been
purchased
: Transferable, Content Key has not been purchased
or otherwise obtained
: Nontransferable, Content Key has already been
purchased
: Nontransferable, Content Key has not been
purchased or otherwise obtained
• While Secret Mode is set to Hide
Phonebook Secret Mode is set to On for message
receiver/sender information; only the number or email
addresses appear (instead of the name).
18-6
Messaging Folders
18
EPress w (Save)
Saving as an S! Mail Template
Save received or sent S! Mail as an S! Mail template.
AIn Message window, select Options →
Save as S! Mail template
Message Window Options
Note
• When an underlined phone number, mail address
or URL is highlighted on a message window, Add to
Phonebook does not appear in Options.
Tip
• If a message appears indicating name duplication
aPress c
bPress c (Select) and enter the name
cPress w (Save)
• When a name entry window has opened
aPress c (Select) and enter the name
bPress w (Save)
Note
• While displaying S! Mail sent from a PC or other
devices, Add to S! Mail template does not appear in
Options.
Item Description
Play Play Slide Show, inserted video, or
sound ( P.17-5).
Retrieved Receive subsequent part of the notified
message.
Reply Reply to the sender of the reception
notification.
Reply to all Send reply to all entered S! Mail
recipients.
Forward Forward received message.
Download
content key Purchase or acquire Content Key.
Delete Delete displayed messages.
Save as S! Mail
template
Add displayed S! Mail as an S! Mail
template ( P.18-6).
18-7
Messaging Folders
18
Replying to a Message
APress w and select Received msgs
BHighlight message, select Options →
Reply
To reply to all recipients entered in the S!
Mail
Highlight message, select Options → Reply to
all
CCreate a message and press
w (Send)
Item copy Save files attached or inserted in an S!
Mail to Data Folder ( P.18-14).
Add to
Phonebook
Save number or mail address to
Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook
( P.18-5).
Details Confirm S! Mail size, etc.
3D Pict. Disp. Display a message in 3D Pictogram
( P.20-5).
Move to Phone/
USIM
Move an SMS received or being sent
to handset or USIM Card ( P.18-18).
Item Description
Tip
• The subject of message replies
The subject of an S! Mail reply is prefixed with "RE:"
automatically.
•While Reply with text is set to On
Under two line breaks, received message text is
automatically entered in Text entry field.
Note
• If free space of the shared memory ( P.25-15) on
708SC is less than 464K bytes, you cannot reply to a
message. To reply to the message, first delete
unnecessary messages.
18-8
Messaging Folders
18
Forwarding a Message
Forward a received or sent message to another
recipient.
APress w and select Received msgs or
Sent msgs
BHighlight message, select Options →
Forward
CCreate a message and press
w (Send)
Sending from Drafts
APress w and select Drafts
BHighlight the message and press
w (Send)
When Send does not appear
aPress c (Edit)
bEnter address and press w (Send)
Tip
• The subject of forwarded messages
The subject of a forwarded S! Mail is prefixed with
"FW:" automatically.
Note
• If free space of the shared memory ( P.25-15) on
708SC is less than 464K bytes, you cannot forward
a message. To forward the message, first delete
unnecessary messages.
18-9
Messaging Folders
18
Sending from Unsent
Messages
Send messages directly from Unsent Messages.
APress w and select Unsent msgs
BHighlight the message and press
w (Send)
To send after modifying
aHighlight the message, select Options →
Edit
bEdit the message and press w (Send)
Deleting a Message
Deleting Specified Message(s)
Delete multiple specified messages. Alternatively,
specify and delete saved templates.
APress w
BSelect a mailbox
To delete a saved S! Mail or SMS templates
Select Templates →S! Mail templates or SMS
templates
CDelete a Message or Template
To delete one message or template
aHighlight the message or template
bSelect Options →Delete →Selected →Yes
To delete multiple messages or templates
aSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
bCheck a message or template to delete
cRepeat b to check all of the target messages
or templates
dPress w (Delete) and proceed to f when
all are not checked
eEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm)
fSelect Yes
18-10
Messaging Folders
18
Designating & Deleting a
Mailbox
APress w to select Settings →Delete
all
BCheck a mailbox to delete
CRepeat Step 2 to check all target
mailboxes
DPress w (Delete)
EEnter Phone Password, and press
c (Confirm) to select Yes
Tip
• To view the contents of multiple messages or S!
Mail templates while selecting them
aRepeat Steps 1 and 2
bSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
cHighlight message or S! Mail template, select
Options →View
• To collectively select/deselect multiple messages or
S! Mail templates
aRepeat Steps 1 and 2
bSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
cSelect Options →Mark all or Unmark all
• To collectively select/deselect multiple SMS
templates
aPerform Steps 1 and 2
bSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
cPress o (Mark all) or o (Unmark all)
Note
• While highlighting an S! Mail template designated
as default, Delete does not appear in Options.
18-11
Messaging Folders
18
Deleting All Messages from a
Mailbox
Delete saved templates all at once.
APress w
BSelect a mailbox
To delete an S! Mail or SMS template
Select Templates →S! Mail templates or SMS
templates
CSelect Options →Delete →All
DEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
Linked Information
If Message window or Notification details window
contains an underlined number, mail address, or
URL; save it to Phonebook or use it to place a call,
send messages, save bookmark, or access the site.
As linked information, following number of
characters can be recognized for each S! Mail Font
size setting:
Maximum of 45 lines (1,035 characters) for
Standard,
54 lines (1,026 characters) for Large, and 41 lines
(1,025 characters) for Small.
Note
• Personal folders cannot be deleted by this
operation. To delete Personal folders, perform the
following operations: Messaging →Settings →
Delete all
• You cannot delete the S! Mail template designated
as the default.
18-12
Messaging Folders
18
Saving to Phonebook
AIn Message window, select a phone
number, mail address, or URL and
select Add to phonebook →Phone or
USIM
BSelect saving method to create a new
entry or update an existing entry
To save as a new entry
Select New
To save to an existing entry
aSelect Update
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
CSelect an icon
DSave other items ( P.5-4)
EPress w (Save)
Saving as a Bookmark
AIn Message window, select a URL and
select Bookmark
BPress c (Select) to enter a subject
and press w (Save)
Initiating a Call, Sending a
Message, or Accessing the Web
Use phone number/mail address/URL information in
Message window or Notification details window.
AIn Message window, take procedures
down below
Note
• When you select a URL, you cannot select USIM in
Step 1.
18-13
Messaging Folders
18
To initiate a Voice Call
Select a phone number and select Voice call
To initiate a Video Call
Select a phone number and select Video call
To send a message
aSelect a phone number or mail address and
select Create msg
bCreate a message and press w (Send)
To access the Web
Select URL and select Go to URL
Using an Attachment
Viewing an Attachment
Open images/play sounds attached to S! Mail. For
vCard/vCalendar, open Details to see contents.
ASelect a file and select Open file
Tip
• Operations in Notification details window
Phone number/mail address/URL information except
in From (other party's phone number) can be used.
Tip
• To save a file in Data Folder directly
In Message window, select a file →Save items
• To save vCard/vCalendar to Phonebook/Calendar
directly
In Message window, select a file →Register to
Phonebook or Register to Calendar
• To register vCard/vCalendar to Phonebook/
Calendar after viewing
aPerform Step 1
bPress c (Register)
18-14
Messaging Folders
18
Saving Attachments to Data
Folder
Save S! Mail attachment/inserted files to 708SC.
AIn Message window, select Options →
Save items
BPerform file selection operation
To select and save one file
aHighlight a file
bPress c (Select) or select Options →
Selected
To select and save multiple files
aSelect Options →Multiple
bCheck the files to save
cRepeat b to check all target files
dPress w (Save)
To save all files
Select Options →All
• When a file requiring Content Key is attached
If you perform Step 1, a message appears and you
cannot open the file. To view the file, select Save items
in Step 1 to save and purchase/obtain Content Key
from Data Folder ( P.11-14).
• When an attachment has a restriction (only one
time playback allowed)
When you perform Step 1, a message appears notifying
you that only one time playback is allowed).
Tip
• To select or deselect multiple files at once
aIn Step 2, select Options → Multiple
bPress o (Mark all) or o (Unmark all)
• When a popup message appears indicating the file
name is a duplicate while saving
aPress c
bPress c (Select) and change the file name
cPress w (Save)
Note
18-15
Messaging Folders
18
Managing Folders
Create personal folders in Received msgs; organize
and save in the folders for each mail types. Set own
security setting for personal folders.
Create Folder
APress w and select Received msgs
BSelect Options →Create folder
CEnter a name
Edit Folder
Change name for personal folders.
APress w and select Received msgs
BSelect Options →Edit folder
CEnter a name
Security ON/OFF
Set Security setting for a personal folder; require
Phone Password entry to check messages in the
personal folder.
APress w and select Received msgs
BHighlight the personal folder, select
Options →Security ON/OFF
CEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm), then select Yes
• When a file is highlighted in Message window, Save
items does not appear in Options.
Tip
• Folder with Security setting
appears indicating Security setting has been
selected.
18-16
Messaging Folders
18
Moving Messages
APress w and select Received msgs
To move messages in personal folder to
another personal folder
Select a personal folder
BHighlight message, select Options →
Move this
CSelect the destination folder
To resent messages to Received msgs
Select Received msgs
• With Security settings On
Select personal folders; Phone Password entry window
appears. Enter Phone Password and press c;
Message list window in the personal folder appears.
18-17
Messaging Folders
18
Delete Folder
APress w and select Received msgs
BHighlight the personal folder, select
Options →Delete folder →Yes
To select personal folder with Security setting
On
Enter Phone Password and press c (Confirm)
CSelect Yes
From Message List
Saving to Phonebook
APress w and select Received msgs,
Unsent msgs or Sent msgs
BHighlight message, select Options →
Add to Phonebook
CSelect a phone number or mail
address and select Phone or USIM
DSelect saving method to create a new
entry or update an existing entry
To save as a new entry
Select New
To save to an existing entry
aSelect Update
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
ESelect an icon
FEnter additional items as required
( P.5-4)
GPress w (Save)
18-18
Messaging Folders
18
Sorting Messages
Available sorting types to display vary by Message
list window of the mailbox.
AIn Message list window, select
Options →Sort by
BSelect an item
To sort in descending order of date
Select Date
To sort by sender
Select Sender
To sort by recipient
Select Recipient
To display read and unread messages
separately
Select Unread to read or Read to unread
To display messages separately by message
type
Select Message type
To sort by subject
Select Subject
To sort in descending order of message size
Select Size
Tip
• Listing order when selecting Message type
Listed in the order of SMS → S! Mail (Including
message notification) → SMS saved in USIM Card.
• Listing order when selecting Sender, Recipient, or
Subject
Listed in the order of single-byte symbol →single-
byte number → single-byte alphabet →single-byte
Katakana →double-byte symbol →double-byte
Hiragana →double-byte Katakana →Kanji →
double-byte number → double-byte alphabet. But if
Subject is selected, messages with no subject are listed
at the top.
18-19
Messaging Folders
18
Move to Phone/Move to USIM
Move received SMS or sent SMS.
Save up to ten messages to USIM Card.
APress w and select Received msgs or
Sent msgs
BMove messages
To move from USIM Card to 708SC
aHighlight an SMS saved on USIM Card
bSelect Options →Move to phone
To move from 708SC to USIM Card
aHighlight an SMS saved in USIM Card
bSelect Options →Move to USIM
Saving an S! Mail Template
For more information about saving an SMS template,
see "SMS Templates" ( P.4-16).
APress w and select Templates →
S! Mail templates
BSelect Options →Add new
Tip
• Message List SMS Indicators
: Unread SMS
: Read SMS
: Unread SMS (USIM Card)
: Read SMS (USIM Card)
: Sent SMS
: Sent SMS (USIM Card)
• To move received SMS in personal folder to USIM
Card
A confirmation message appears. Select Yes to
complete the move.
18-20
Messaging Folders
18
CSelect Subject field or Text entry field
and enter a subject or message
DPress w (Save)
Message List Options
Tip
• To view an S! Mail template being created
In Step 3, select Options →Preview
• To display and view an S! Mail template
In Step 2, highlight S! Mail template, select Options →
View
• To modify an S! Mail template
aIn Step 2, select a registered S! Mail template and
perform modification operation
bPress w (Save)
• To delete an S! Mail template
Perform the same operation as for a message ( P.18-
9).
• To copy, cut, or paste characters ( P.4-13)
• To use contents of an SMS template or Phonebook
( P.4-11)
• To change the font size of characters being entered
aIn Step 3, select Text entry field, select Options →
Font Size
bSelect any of Small,Standard, or Large
• To set/release the prediction entry function
( P.4-14)
• Setting Slide Show/inserting a file
aIn Step 3, select Options →Insert or Create &
Insert
bPerform setting, attaching, or inserting operation
( P.17-13, 17-18, 17-20)
• To view the text in 3D Pictogram
In Step 3, highlight Text entry field, select Options →
3D Pict.Disp.
Item Description
Retrieve Retrieve complete S! Mail from the
Server.
Reply Reply to the sender ( P.18-7).
Reply to all Send reply to all entered S! Mail
recipients ( P.18-7).
18-21
Messaging Folders
18
Forward Forward received message ( P.18-8).
Move this Move received mails to a personal
folder ( P.18-16).
Create folder Create a personal folder ( P.18-15).
Edit folder Change personal folder name ( P.18-
15).
Security On/Off
With Security setting On, enter Phone
Password to check mails in a personal
folder ( P.18-15).
Delete folder Delete a personal folder ( P.18-16).
View Open sent messages or S! Mail
templates ( P.18-3, 18-19).
Edit Edit unsent message ( P.18-8).
Delete Delete messages or templates ( P.18-
9, 18-11).
Move to phone/
Move to USIM
Move SMS between 708SC and
USIM Card ( P.18-18).
Sort by Sort messages ( P.18-17).
Add to
Phonebook
Save number or mail address to
Phonebook or USIM Card Phonebook
( P.18-16).
Item Description
Details Check memory status in a personal
folder or confirm S! Mail size, etc.
Cancel
retrieving
Stop message retrieval from Mail
Server.
Send Send message using S! Mail template
or SMS template ( P.17-15).
Add new Save a new S! Mail template or SMS
template ( P.4-16, 18-19).
Item Description
18-22
Server Mail
19-2
Server Mail
19
Message List
View messages stored on the Mail Server in a list
form. Retrieve, forward, or delete messages.
Acquire Mail List
APress w and select Server mail box
BSelect Acquire Mail List
Download
APress w and select Server mail box
BSelect Mail List
CHighlight the message, select Options
→Download
Tip
• To check Mail Server usage state
aSelect Server mail volume in Step 2
bPress c (Update) and select Yes to update to the
latest information
Tip
• To receive all messages from Message list window
In Step 2, select Retrieve All Mail
19-3
Server Mail
19
Delete
APress w and select Server mail box
BSelect Mail List
CDelete unwanted messages
To delete one message
aHighlight a message
bSelect Options →Delete →Selected →Yes
To delete multiple messages
aSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
bCheck a message to delete
cRepeat b to check all target messages to
delete
dPress w (Delete) and go to f if unmarking
all
eEnter Phone Password and press c
(Confirm)
fSelect Yes
To delete all messages
aSelect Options →Delete →All
bEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm)
and select Yes
Tip
• To select/deselect multiple messages at once
aPerform Steps 1 and 2
bSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
cSelect Options →Mark all or Unmark all
19-4
Server Mail
19
Remote Forward
Forward a message from the Mail Server to another
address. Contents except the address are sent without
modification.
APress w and select Server mail box
BSelect Mail List
CHighlight message, select Options →
Remote Forward
DEnter an address
To directly enter an address
aSelect Entry field and select Enter Recipient
bEnter a phone number or mail address
To enter an address using a log
Select Entry field and select a displayed log
entry
To select an address from Phonebook
aSelect Entry field and select From
Phonebook
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
cHighlight a phone number or mail address
and press w (Select)
To select an address from Category of
Phonebook
aSelect Entry field and select From Category
19-5
Server Mail
19
bSelect a Category, with/without an Address
selection window, highlight an address and
press w (Select)
ESelect Options →Send
Tip
• Message subject
The subject of a forwarded message is prefixed with
"FW:" automatically.
• To set other sending options for a message being
created
aIn Step 5, select Options →Sending options
bSelect an item and perform operations to set
( P.20-2)
cPress w (Apply)
• To delete an address
In Step 5, highlight a recipient, select Options →
Remove
• To change the address type to To, Cc, or Bcc
aIn Step 5, highlight a recipient, select Options →
Change recipients
bSelect any of To,Cc, or Bcc
19-6
Other Message Settings
20-2
Other Message Settings
20
Customizing Handset
Address
Change your mail address (alphanumerics before @)
used for sending and receiving S! Mail to/from PC,
etc. The default account name consists of random
alphanumerics.
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail →Mail Address setting
BFollow onscreen instructions
S! Mail Settings
Sending Settings
Set options related to sending S! Mail. Alternatively,
set sending options separately for each S! Mail to
send
(P.17-13).
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail → Sending options
BSelect an item and set
Message priority
aSelect Priority
bSelect a level and press c
Retention period (before expire) on the Mail
Server
aSelect Expiration
bSelect an item and enter a time if you
selected Custom time (Hour)
cPress c
Retention period (before delivery) on the
Mail Server
Default
Setting
■Priority: Normal ■Expiration: Maximum
■Delivery: Immediately
■Request delivery report: Unchecked
20-3
Other Message Settings
20
aSelect Delivery
bSelect an item and press c
Delivery report request
Check Request delivery report
CPress w (Save)
Receiving Settings
Set options related to receiving S! Mail.
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail → Receiving options
Tip
• When the retention set in Expiration expires
The S! Mail is deleted automatically from the Mail
Server.
• When retention is set in Delivery
When the specified time has elapsed, the S! Mail is
sent from the Mail Server.
• When Request delivery report is checked
When an S! Mail is sent from the Mail Server, a
distribution report is sent to your handset.
Default
Setting
■Home network: Manual
■Roaming network: Manual
20-4
Other Message Settings
20
BSelect an item and set
To set the receiving method to use in Japan
aSelect Home network
bSelect an item and press c
To set the receiving method while overseas
aSelect Roaming network
bSelect an item and press c
CPress w (Save)
Message Size
Deactivate sending messages exceeding the specified
size.
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail → Message size
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
Default Style
Set font color, font style, background color, and Slide
Show time intervals. Alternatively, change display
settings for each S! Mail sent ( P.17-14).
Tip
• The contents of Home network and Roaming
network are:
Auto download: Receive automatically.
Manual: Receive only reception notification.
Default
Setting
■300KB
Default
Setting
■Font color: Black ■Font size: Large
■Background color: White
■Slide interval: Custom time (3 seconds)
20-5
Other Message Settings
20
APress w and select Settings →
S! Mail →Default style
BSet options
Font color
aSelect Font color
bUse a to highlight a color and press c
To set a font size
aSelect Font Size
bSelect an item and press c
Background color
aSelect Background color
bUse a to highlight a color and press c
Slide Show time intervals
aSelect Slide interval
bSelect an item, with Custom time, enter a
time
cPress c
CPress w (Save)
SMS Settings
Set options related to sending SMS. Alternatively, set
options for each SMS to send ( P.17-13).
APress w and select Settings →SMS
BSet options
Request a delivery report
Check Delivery report
Change the character set of fonts used in the
text
aSelect Character support
bSelect an item and press c
CPress w (Save)
Default
Setting
■Delivery report: Unchecked
■Character support: Automatic
20-6
Other Message Settings
20
3D Pictogram Settings
3D Pictogram is a function that allows you to display
in 3D animation for words, pictograms, or emoticons
in message text.
Activate or deactivate 3D Pictogram or set the
background color and display speed.
APress w and select Settings →
3D pictogram
BSet options
Whether to use 3D Pictogram
aSelect Display type
bSelect an item and press c (Save)
Background pattern and font colors
aSelect Background
bPress s, display the pattern and press
c (Save)
To set a display speed
aSelect Running speed
bSelect an item and press c (Save)
Tip
• When Delivery report is checked
When an SMS is sent from the Mail Server, a
distribution report is sent to your handset.
Default
Setting
■Display type: New mails only
■Background: Pattern 1
■Running Speed: Normal
Tip
• The contents of Display type are:
Always: Use 3D Pictogram when viewing every
message.
New mails only: Use 3D Pictogram only when viewing
an unread message received.
OFF: Not use 3D Pictogram.
20-7
Other Message Settings
20
Reply with text
When creating reply message, set to include received
message text.
APress w and select Settings →Reply
with text
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
Note
• Such as file-attached/Slide Show set S! Mail may
not appear properly in 3D Pictogram.
Default
Setting
■Off
Tip
• The contents of Reply with text are:
On: Reply with text including received message text.
Off: Reply with text not including received message
text.
Mobile Internet
21-2
Mobile Internet
21
Getting Started
Web
From a handset, access to Yahoo! Keitai and the Web
to browse various sites or download images, sounds,
etc.
A separate subscription is required to use the Web.
Accessing from the Yahoo! Keitai Main Menu
From the Yahoo! Keitai main menu, select a menu
items to access various contents.
Internet Accessing
Enter a URL and access pages.
SSL/TLS
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer
Security (TLS) are encryption protocols for secure
Internet transmissions of important/sensitive
information (credit card numbers, etc.) and
authentication. Confirm electronic certificates saved
on 708SC ( P.22-14, 23-4).
SSL/TLS Precautions
When a security notice appears, subscribers must decide
for themselves whether or not to open the page.
Opening secure pages constitutes agreement to the
terms of usage. SOFTBANK MOBILE Corp., VeriSign
Japan K.K., Betrusted Japan Co., Ltd., and Entrust
Japan Co., Ltd. are not liable for damages associated
with SSL/TLS use.
Cache
Retrieved Mobile Internet pages are temporarily
saved here. Cache remains even after a session ends
or 708SC is turned off. When full, oldest pages are
automatically deleted to make room for new ones.
When a saved page is opened again, it may open
from Cache. For the latest version, reload the page
(P.22-13).
Tip
21-3
Mobile Internet
21
Getting Online
Yahoo! Keitai Main Menu
Access Mobile Internet sites via Yahoo! Keitai main
menu
APress o
Alternatively, press o for 1+ seconds
Yahoo! Keitai menu appears. Select Yahoo!
Keitai to open Yahoo! Keitai main menu.
BSelect an item
• To manually delete Cache contents ( P.23-4)
• When another USIM Card is inserted into 708SC
Cache contents are automatically deleted.
• When a page with an expiry date is saved
Page is automatically deleted upon expiry.
Tip
• When accessing Mobile Internet for the first time
After Step 1, Time & date settings window appears; set
time & date to display Information window.
21-4
Mobile Internet
21
Enter URL
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Enter URL
BSelect URL field and enter a URL
CPress w (Go to)
Page Window Operations
Operations on pages are as follows.
Scrolling
Scroll bar appears when page content extends
beyond current view.
d/r: Scroll down by one line
When a horizontal scroll bar appears, use r to
scroll right
u/l: Scroll up by one line
When a horizontal scroll bar appears, use l to
scroll left
Tip
• To save the entered URL as a bookmark
aIn Step 2, check Add bookmark
bSelect Title field and enter title
cPress w (Go to)
• To access a page from the access history ( P.22-11)
くじらの化石を発掘
ニュース（速報）
×× 県○○市のビル工事現場
で、約
３００
万年前のくじらの化
石を発見。
化石の特徴から、△△くじらの
一種ではないかとみられてい
る。
○○市ではこれまでにくじら
の化石が
１０
体発掘されている
戻る
くじらの化石を発掘
×× 県○○市のビル工事現場
で、約
３００
万年前のくじらの化
石を発見。
化石の特徴から、△△くじらの
一種ではないかとみられてい
る。
○○市ではこれまでにくじら
の化石が
１０
体発掘されている
が、今回発見されたのは他の
ものよりも
５０
万年ほど古いと
戻る
d/r/b
u/l/n
Scroll bar
21-5
Mobile Internet
21
Side Key b: Scroll page down by multiple lines
Side Key n: Scroll page up by multiple lines
Moving Cursor
When selecting an item such as link, move cursor to
that item.
/
dr: When items are listed vertically, move
cursor down
When the page is already scrolled to the bottom,
alternatively, press Side Key b to move cursor
down
/
ul: When items are listed vertically, move
cursor up
When the page is already scrolled to the top,
alternatively, press Side Key n to move cursor up
Previous or Next Page
Highlight link, etc. and press c: Display the next
page
Alternatively, select Options →Forward to
change the window
ニュース
１．
国内のニュース
２．
海外のニュース
３．
政治
４．
経済
５．
スホ゜ーツ
６．
その他
戻る 選択
ニュース
１．
国内のニュース
２．
海外のニュース
３．
政治
４．
経済
５．
スホ゜ーツ
６．
その他
戻る 選択
d/r
u/l
Cursor
Tip
• When items are listed in the same row
Press s to move cursor right or left.
• When you move cursor
The selected item is highlighted or enclosed in a frame
of dotted lines if it is link to another page.
ニュース
１．
国内のニュース
２．
海外のニュース
３．
政治
４．
経済
５．
スホ゜ーツ
６．
その他
戻る 選択
ニュース（スポーツ）
１．
野球
２．
サッカー
３．
ゴルフ
４．
その他
戻る 選択
c
w (Back)/
C
21-6
Mobile Internet
21
w (Back) or C: Display the previous page
Text Entry/Item Selection
An information window may show fields and items
given below.
aText entry field
Enter data, certification passwords, etc.; highlight
Text entry field, press c and enter text
Tip
•If w (Back)/C is pressed with no previous
page displayed
A message appears asking whether to terminate the
Web connection; select Yes to terminate the Web
connection.
お名前
性別 男 女
住所
アンケート（複数選択可）
初めて購入した
もう一度購入したい
友達にも薦めたい
送信 キャンセル
戻る 選択
aText entry field
bRadio
cMenu field
dCheck box
eCommand
21-7
Mobile Internet
21
bRadio button
Select only one of the selection items. Highlight an
item with and press c to select it (Appearing as
).
cMenu field
Display a menu and select an item. Highlight a menu,
press c to display the menu. Use j to highlight
the item and press c to select the item. When
multiple items can be selected for Menu field, press
C to cancel multiple selections.
dCheck box
Select any number of selection items. Highlight an
item with and press c to select it (Appearing as
). To deselect a selected item, highlight and
press c.
eCommand button
Perform operations assigned to a button such as send
or reset. Highlight a command button and press c
to execute the operation.
Using Linked Info
Use phone numbers, mail addresses, and URLs
contained on an page to initiate calls, create and send
messages, and access other pages.
Available phone numbers, mail addresses, and URLs
are underlined.
Note
• The appearance of text entry or item selection
varies by page opened.
21-8
Mobile Internet
21
Using Page Links
AOpen a page containing linked info
BUse the available links
To initiate a Voice Call
Select a phone number and select Voice Call
To create and send messages
aSelect a phone number or mail address and
select Create message
bCreate messages and press w (Send)
To access another page
Select a URL
Saving to Phonebook
AOpen a page with linked number or
address
BSelect a number or address and select
Save Number or Save Address →
Phone or USIM
CCreate a new entry or update an
existing entry
To save as a new entry
Select New
To add to an existing entry
aSelect Update
bSearch for an existing entry to modify ( P.5-
9)
DSelect an icon
ESave the item ( P.5-4)
FPress w(Save)
21-9
21-10
Mobile Internet
21
Mobile Internet Files
22-2
Mobile Internet Files
22
Using Image Files
Saving Images to Data Folder
Saving Linked Images
Download and save images from page links.
AOpen a page containing an image link
BSelect link
CPress c
When details appear
Press c
DPress C
To open the image
Press c (Launch)
To set saved image as Wallpaper
Press w (Set) and perform Step 3 in
"Wallpaper" ( P.22-3)
Saving Page Images
Save a page image to Data Folder.
AOpen a page with an image
BSelect Options →Save →Save image
CHighlight the image and press
c (Save)
DPress C
To open the image
Press c (Launch)
To set saved image as Wallpaper
Press w (Set) and perform Step 3 in
"Wallpaper" ( P.22-3)
EPress C to end the operation
To save another image
Repeat Step 3
22-3
Mobile Internet Files
22
Wallpaper
Set a saved image as Wallpaper.
AOpen image to set as Wallpaper
( P.22-2)
BPress w (Set as)
CSelect an item
To set as Wallpaper
aSelect Wallpaper
bPress c (Set)
To set as incoming image for Phonebook
entries
aSelect Caller ID
bSearch Phonebook and select an entry ( P.5-
9)
cPress c (Set)
To set as outgoing image
aSelect TV call Still picture
Tip
• If the same file name exists
aPress c (Edit) and change the file name
bPress w (Save)
• Viewing images
Press w (Set as) to set Wallpaper. ( P.22-3).
Press c (Zoom) to enlarge or reduce the image.
Press
o (Details) to view image details.
• When SVG-T/SWF format file is saved
Options appears on the save image confirmation
window, then select Options and execute various
operations
( P.11-9).
22-4
Mobile Internet Files
22
bPress c (Save)
Using Sound Files
Playing Sound
Play sounds from page links.
AOpen a page containing link
BSelect link to sound
Note
• For SVG-T/SWF format file, Settings does not
appear. For Wallpaper, open Data Folder and open
an image ( P.11-9).
22-5
Mobile Internet Files
22
Saving Sound Files to Data
Folder
Download sound files from page links and save them
to Data Folder.
AOpen a page containing a sound link
BSelect link
CPress c
When details appear
Press c
DSelect Exit
To play sound
Select Launch
Saving Sound Being Played
Save sound played in the background while viewing
a page.
AOpen a page with sound
BSelect Options →Save →Save sound
CPress C
To play sound
Press c (Launch)
To set saved sound as Ringtone
Press w (Set as) and perform Step 3 in
"Setting Sound File as Ringtone" ( P.11-12)
22-6
Mobile Internet Files
22
Options
The items listed vary by the window status.
Using Video Files
Playing a Video
Play video from a page link.
AOpen a page containing a video link
BSelect link
Saving Videos to Data Folder
Download and save videos from page links.
AOpen a page containing a video link
BSelect link
CPress c
When details appear
Press c
DPress C
Tip
• If same file name exists
aPress c (Edit) and change the file name
bPress w (Save)
• To play sounds
Press w (Set as) and set saved sound as Ringtone
( P.11-12). For other operations, refer to Media
Player ( P.10-3).
Item Description
Stop Stop playing.
View bookmark
Access a page containing a
streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
View history
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Details Confirm sound size, etc.
Player settings Select settings related to Media
Player ( P.10-7).
22-7
Mobile Internet Files
22
To play video
Press c (Launch)
To set saved video as Ringtone
Press w (Set as) and perform Step 3 in
"Setting Video File as Ringtone" ( P.11-12)
Options
The items listed vary by the window status.
Streaming
Enjoy audio visual media while it downloads. Access
compatible files via page links, etc. Downloaded
content cannot be saved.
AOpen a page containing a streaming
video link
BSelect link
Tip
• If same file name exists
aPress c (Edit) and change the file name
bPress w (Save)
• To play video
Press w (Set as) and set saved video as Ringtone
( P.11-12). For other operations, refer to Media
Player ( P.10-9).
Item Description
Resolution Set video display size while playing
or paused.
View bookmark
Access a page containing a
streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
View history
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Details Set video display size while playing
or paused.
Player settings
Select settings related to Media
Player
( P.10-12).
Item Description
22-8
Mobile Internet Files
22
Options
The items listed vary by the window status.
Tip
• To stream files
Operate the same as Media Player ( P.10-3, 10-9).
Note
• Even when use of streaming is temporarily stopped,
communications continue, so packet
communication fees continue.
Item Description
Resolution Set video display size while playing
or paused.
Add bookmark
During accessing, save a page
containing a streaming play link as
a bookmark.
View bookmark
Access a page containing a
streaming play link saved as a
bookmark.
View history
Access a page containing a
streaming play link already
accessed.
Item Description
22-9
Mobile Internet Files
22
Saving Pages
Saving a Page
Save a displayed page and open it at any time
without accessing the Web. Up to 50 pages can be
saved.
AOpen a page
BSelect Options →Saved pages → Save
Opening a Saved Page
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Saved pages
BSelect a page
Change Title
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Saved pages
BHighlight a page, select Options →
Rename
CPress c (Edit) and change the
name
DPress w (Save)
22-10
Mobile Internet Files
22
Deleting a Saved Page
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Saved pages
BDelete as required
To delete one page
aHighlight a page
bSelect Options →Delete →Selected →Yes
To delete multiple pages
aSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
bCheck a page to delete
cRepeat Step b to check all target pages
dPress w (Delete) and select Yes
To delete all pages
aSelect Options →Delete →All
bEnter Phone Password, press w (OK) and
select Yes
Saving Bookmarks
Saving an Address as a
Bookmark
By saving the Web addresses (URLs) of frequently
used pages as bookmarks, access those pages. Up to
30 URLs can be saved as bookmarks.
AOpen a page
BSelect Options →Bookmarks →Add
to Bookmarks
Tip
• To select/deselect multiple pages at once
aIn Step 2, select Options →Delete →Multiple
bSelect Options →Selected/All
22-11
Mobile Internet Files
22
CCheck the title and URL
To change the title/URL
aSelect Title or URL field
bChange a title or URL
DPress w (Save)
Opening a Bookmark
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Bookmarks
BSelect a bookmark
Editing Bookmarks
Modify the title or URL of bookmark.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Bookmarks
BHighlight a bookmark, select Options
→Edit bookmark
CSelect Title field or URL field, and
modify the title or URL
DPress w (Save)
Tip
• To manually enter and save a bookmark
aPress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →Bookmarks
bSelect Options →Add bookmark
cSelect Subject field and enter a subject
dSelect URL field and enter a URL
ePress w (Save)
Tip
• To send a bookmark URL in a message
aIn Step 2, highlight a bookmark, select Options →
Send URL
bCreate a message and press w (Send)
22-12
Mobile Internet Files
22
Deleting a Bookmark
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Bookmarks
BDelete as required
To delete one bookmark
aHighlight a bookmark
bSelect Options →Delete →Selected →Yes
To delete multiple bookmarks
aSelect Options → Delete →Multiple
bCheck a bookmark to delete
cRepeat b to check all target bookmarks
dPress w (Delete) and select Yes
To delete all bookmarks
aSelect Options →Delete → All
bEnter Phone Password, press w (OK) and
select Yes
History
The history records up to 50 URLs of accessed
pages. Using the history, access pages previously
accessed.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
History
BUse the history
To access a page from the history URL
Select URL
To delete a history URL
aHighlight the URL
bSelect Options →Delete →Selected →Yes
Tip
• To select/deselect multiple bookmarks at once
aIn Step 2, select Options →Delete →Multiple
bSelect Options →Selected/All
22-13
Mobile Internet Files
22
To delete multiple histories
aSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
bCheck a history to delete
cRepeat b to check all target histories
dPress w (Delete) and select Yes
To delete all histories
aSelect Options →Delete →All
bEnter Phone Password, press w (OK) and
select Yes
Display Settings
Rendering
Set pages to match Display size or show only text.
AOpen a page
BSelect Options →Rendering
CSelect an item
To display a page without changing its layout
Select Wide
To display a page to fit Display
Select Standard
To display only page text
Select Simple
Tip
• To select/deselect multiple histories collectively
aIn Step 2, select Options →Delete →Multiple
bSelect Options →Selected/All
Default
Setting
■Standard
22-14
Mobile Internet Files
22
Search Text
ADisplay information window
BSelect Options →Search text
CSelect Text entry field and enter the
word
DSelect the searching direction and
press w (Search)
Copy Text
ADisplay information window
BSelect Options →Copy Text
CIn a text entry window, select Options
→Copy
DUse a to move cursor on the first
character and press c (Start)
To copy all texts in text entry window
Press o (All) to copy
EUse a to specify the range and
press c (End)
Reload
AOpen a page
BSelect Options →Reload
22-15
Mobile Internet Files
22
Page Details
View current page information including URL and
page title.
AOpen a page
BSelect Options →Browser setting →
Page details
Send URL
Attach the URL of the current page to a message and
send it.
AOpen a page
BSelect Options →Send URL
CCreate a message and press w
(Send)
Server Certificate
View server certificates of a page using a SSL/TLS
connection.
AOpen a secure page
BSelect Options →Browser setting →
Certificates
CSelect Server certification and select a
certificate
Tip
• When you open a page that uses SSL/TLS
appears on the top of Display.
22-16
Mobile Internet Files
22
Returning to Default Page
Return to the Yahoo! Keitai main menu.
AOpen a page
BFrom any page, select Options →
Yahoo! Keitai
Encoding
If page text appears garbled, change character
encoding.
AOpen a page
BSelect Options →Browser setting →
Encoding
CSelect an option and press c (Save)
Information Window Options
Default
Setting
■Auto
Item Description
Forward Move to the next information window
( P.21-5).
Bookmark Add or open bookmarks ( P.22-9).
Saved pages
Save information windows to Saved
pages. Display information window from
Saved pages ( P.22-8, 22-8).
Text search Search text in information window
( P.22-13).
Reload Reload the information for a page
( P.22-13).
Enter URL Enter a URL to open another site/page
( P.21-4).
Rendering Change the displaying method for pages
( P.22-15).
Copy text Copy text in information window
( P.22-13).
Save Save images and sounds to Data Folder
( P.22-2, 22-4).
22-17
Mobile Internet Files
22
Send URL Send URLs of a page in a message
( P.22-14).
History Access a page you have already visited
( P.22-11).
Yahoo! Keitai Return to the Yahoo! Keitai main menu
( P.22-15).
Browser
setting Make detailed settings for Web Browser.
Text size Set text size in information window
( P.23-3).
Download
s
Set various settings for image/sound
downloads ( P.23-2).
Empty
cache Delete all information from the cache.
Empty
cookies
Delete all cookies (tokens left by various
Web sites on your handset).
Cookie
options Activate or deactivate cookies.
Certificate
sView the certificate ( P.22-14, 23-4).
Page
details
View the detailed information about a
page ( P.22-14).
Item Description
Manufactur
e No.
Set whether to notify a Web site of your
handset's serial number.
Encoding Change the character codes set for the
page currently displayed ( P.22-15).
Java Script Set Java Script on/off ( P.23-3).
About
browser
View detailed information about the
browser.
Item Description
Other Web Settings
23-2
Other Web Settings
23
Preferences
Set 708SC to deactivate embedded images/sounds
when opening pages. Pages download more quickly
without image and sound data.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings →Downloads
BPerform operations to set
To deactivate images
aSelect Display images
bSelect an item and press w (Save)
To deactivate sounds
aSelect Play sound
bSelect an item and press w (Save)
Security
Cookie Options
Activate or deactivate Cookies that allow
information providers to automatically record
information identifying handset user. User
information, access date, and other information are
saved in Cookies.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings →Cookie options
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
Default
Setting
■Display images: Checked
■Play sound: Checked Default
Setting
■Accept all
Tip
23-3
Other Web Settings
23
Activating/Deactivating Java
Script
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings →Java script
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
Text Size
Change the size of the page fonts.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings →Text size
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
• The contents of Cookie options are:
Accept all: Always accept Cookies.
Reject all: Always reject Cookies.
Prompt: Confirm Cookies each time they appear.
Default
Setting
■Off
Default
Setting
■Normal
23-4
Other Web Settings
23
Manufacture Number
Set 708SC to automatically send handset serial
number to Websites upon request for user
identification.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings →Manufacture
number
BSelect an item and press c (Save)
Browser Information
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings →About browser
Certificates
View electronic certificate saved on 708SC.
AOpen a page using SSL/TLS
BSelect Options →Browser setting →
Certificates
CSelect Root certificate to view the
certificate
Default
Setting
■Off
23-5
Other Web Settings
23
Refresh Browser
Empty Cache/Empty Cookies
Delete information saved in Cache and Cookies.
APress c and select Yahoo! Keitai →
Browser settings
BDelete as required
To delete Cache contents
Select Empty cache →c (Yes)
To delete Cookies
Select Empty cookies →c (Yes)
23-6
Other Web Settings
23
S! Appli
24-2
S! Appli
24
Getting Started
S! Appli
Download 708SC-compatible S! Appli including
games, 3D images, and information via Mobile
Internet sites.
• Use only compatible S! Appli.
• To download S! Appli, separate subscription is
required and communication fees apply.
Network S! Appli
Some S! Appli require network connection. Enjoy
network gaming or access real-time information like
stock prices.
• A separate subscription is required to download
S! Appli or use those which require network
connection.
• Connection fees apply.
Downloading S! Appli
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BSelect Download S! Appli
CSelect S! Appli to download
DSelect Yes
When details appear
Press c
ESelect Exit
To activate S! Appli
Select Launch
24-3
S! Appli
24
Starting S! Appli
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BSelect S! Appli and press c (Start)
Exit, Pause, & Resume
Exiting or Pausing S! Appli
APress y while a S! Appli is being
executed
BChoose to exit/pause
To exit S! Appli
Press w (Exit)
To pause S! Appli
Press c (Pause)
Tip
• When S! Appli is active
appears.
Tip
• When S! Appli is paused
708SC returns to Standby and appears.
• When 708SC is closed while S! Appli is active
S! Appli is paused.
24-4
S! Appli
24
Restarting a Paused S! Appli
AIn Standby with S! Appli paused,
press c and select S! Appli
BPress w (Resume)
Managing S! Appli
Details
Open Details to confirm S! Appli properties.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BHighlight a S! Appli, select Options →
Details
Lock/Unlock
Lock S! Appli to prevent accidental deletion.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BHighlight S! Appli, select Options →
Lock
Tip
• S! Appli properties
Open Details to see following properties:
Name, Description, Profiles, Certification, Size,
Record Size, Version, and Vendor.
Tip
• Locked S! Appli Indicator
In S! Appli list, appears.
• To cancel lock
In Step 2, highlight locked S! Appli, select Options →
Unlock
24-5
S! Appli
24
Delete
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BDelete S! Appli
To delete one S! Appli
Select Options →Delete →Selected →Yes
To delete multiple S! Appli
aSelect Options →Delete →Multiple
bCheck S! Appli to delete
cRepeat Step b to check all target S! Appli
dPress w (Delete) and select Yes
To delete all S! Appli
aSelect Options →Delete →All
bEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm)
and select Yes
cSelect Yes to delete all S! Appli or No to
exclude locked ones
mPet
With 708SC mPet, raise your own virtual pet. Train
or enjoy playing games with.
Selecting Pet
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list →mPet →Yes
Tip
• When all S! Appli are checked
In Step 2, perform a to c in "To delete multiple S!
Appli," press w (Delete) in d and proceed the
following procedures
aEnter Phone Password, press c (Confirm) and
select Yes
bSelect Yes to delete all S! Appli or No to exclude
locked ones
• To select/deselect multiple S! Appli at once
aIn Step 2, select Options →Delete →Multiple
bSelect Options →Mark all or Unmark all
24-6
S! Appli
24
BUse s to select the pet and press
c (Select)
To select pet after checking action
Select Options →animate and press c
(Select)
To select pet after checking direction
Select Options →turn and press c (Select)
CEnter a name
DSelect Yes and press c
Emotion Indicator
mPet Window
Tip
• After selecting your pet
Garden appears. Train or tame in this location. Play
game with in other rooms. Activating mPet shows the
location last used.
• Pet action in mPet window
After a while with no action to pet; pet starts to play
alone, bark, shows it's emotional text bubble. With low
battery, pet gets down and starts sniffing.
• To end mPet
Press C or y
• To set mPet as Wallpaper ( P.8-2)
• mPet Help
Use mPet Help to see other operations. In mPet
window, select Options →Help or press o while
Help appears
24-7
S! Appli
24
mPet Operations
Window Operations
In Options, set Navigation to Shortcut mode, then
press corresponding button to select operation; set
Navigation to Walking mode, then use a to move
pet to specified location and select operation.
Available operations in each location are listed
below.
Locatio
n
Operation
Description
Shortcut
mode
Walking
mode
(Window
area)
Garden
1Notes
(Upper Left)
Play the Ding
Dong game.
2Front Door
(Upper)
Move to Living
Room.
3Flower Bed
(Upper
Right)
Go for a walk.
4Ball
(Down
Right)
Play the Stanza
game.
Living
Room
1Door
(Upper
Left)
Move to Garden.
2Back Door
(Upper
Right)
Move to
Kitchen.
24-8
S! Appli
24
Action Operations
In mPet window, press w (Action) to perform the
operations listed below (Train/Commend/
Discipline). Pet growth varies by operations.
Kitchen
1Back Door
(Upper Left)
Move to Living
Room.
2Door
(Upper
Right)
Move to Bed
Room.
3Bowl
(Down
Right)
Feed full meal.
4Today's
Saying
(Down Left)
Display Today's
Saying.
5Snacks
(Upper) Give snacks.
Bed
Room
1Door
(Upper Left) Move to Kitchen.
2Laundry
Basket
(Upper)
Bathe pet.
Locatio
n
Operation
Description
Shortcut
mode
Walking
mode
(Window
area)
Bed
Room
3Dog House
(Upper
Right)
Pet sleeps.
4Book
(Down
Right)
Play English
Quiz.
5Injector
(Down Left) Cure pet.
Locatio
n
Operation
Description
Shortcut
mode
Walking
mode
(Window
area)
24-9
S! Appli
24
Options
Other Operations
Adopt a New Pet
Up to 5 pets can be adopted.
AIn mPet window, select Options →Pet
Inventory
BSelect Options →Adopt a new pet
Item Description
Train
Sit Teach pet to sit down.
Roll Teach pet to roll over.
Turn Teach pet to turn around.
Bark Teach pet to bark.
Paw Teach pet to give you a paw.
Commend Praise Praise pet for good behavior.
Pet Cheer pet up.
Discipline Warn Order pet not to do.
Punish Punish pet for bad behavior.
Tip
• When pet refuse to act
Pet sometimes refuse to act as operated, due to such as
the first time operation, pet status. Teach pet repeatedly
or check the status and take care.
• When each operation ends
Pet barks and responds to operation with emotional
state text bubble; pet status window appears. Check the
pet status by following category: Health/Fatigue/
Fullness/Clean/Stress/Obedient/Intimacy.
Item Description
Location
Select a location from among
Garden/Living room/Kitchen/
Bedroom.
Pet Inventory Show Pet list to select various
settings ( P.24-9).
Pet Status Check Pet status while pet is
playing around.
Options Select mPet sound/display settings
( P.24-10).
Help Check mPet operations description.
24-10
S! Appli
24
CPerform Steps 2 and 3 in "Select Pet"
( P.24-5)
Pet Inventory
AIn mPet window, select Options →Pet
Inventory
BSelect a pet
Say Goodbye
AIn mPet window, select Options →Pet
Inventory
BHighlight the pet and select Options
→Say Goodbye
CPress o (Yes)
DPress c
Tip
• Pet status
In Step 2, select Options →View status
• Rename your pet
aIn Step 2, highlight the pet
bSelect Options →Rename
cEnter a name
Note
• Note that once gave up your pet, unable to restore
it.
24-11
S! Appli
24
mPet Sound & Settings
AIn mPet window, select Options →
Options
BPerform operations to set
To set pet sound
aSelect Sound
bSelect an item and Press c
To set operation mode
aSelect Navigation
bSelect an item and Press c
To set action menu sound
aSelect Sound type
bSelect an item and Press c
CPress c
Comic Surfing
"コミックサーフィン" is the file viewer for
browsing electronic comic/photo book files (CCF
files) saved in Book folder in Data Folder. Enlarge/
Default
Setting
■Sound: Sound only
■Navigation: Shortcut mode
■Sound type: Voice
Tip
• The contents of Sound are:
Sound & Vibrate: Pet barks and 708SC vibrates
simultaneously.
Sound only: Pet barks.
Vibrate: 708SC vibrates with no pet barking.
No sound: No vibration and with no pet barking.
• The contents of Navigation are:
Shortcut mode: Show available shortcuts indicators in
mPet window to use assigned shortcuts keys.
Walking mode: Use a to move locations with the
pet.
• The contents of Sound type are:
Voice: Indicate the selected action operation by voice.
Melody: Indicate the selected action operation by
melody.
24-12
S! Appli
24
reduce images, scroll the page easily, browse more
lively images with sound/vibration effects.
To browse CCF files, acquire Content Key. No
Content Key is required to browse the default sample
files in 708SC.
Browsing Electronic Comic
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! application list
→
Security
Set whether to allow S! Appli to automatically use
communication functions. Alternatively, set to
display a confirmation message when activating S!
Appli or using communications.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Application list
BHighlight S! Appli, select Options →
Permissions
CSelect items to set
Tip
• After starting
Refer to in .
コミックサーフィン
ヘルプ コミックサーフィン
Default
Setting
■Net Access: Per session
■Application Autoinvocation: Per session
■Local connectivity: Per session
■Read user data access: Per access
■Write use data access: Per access
24-13
S! Appli
24
Web accessing functions
Select Net Access
Automatic starting functions
Select Application Autoinvocation
Connection functions to external devices
Select Local connectivity
Read user data access function
Select Read user data access
Write user data access function
Select Write user data access
DSelect items and press c (Save)
S! Appli Settings
Make S! Appli settings and restore defaults.
Backlight
Set Display settings for the backlight.
Tip
• The contents of Permissions are:
Setting for each item are as follows. Settings vary by
item.
Always: Always allow the use of the function.
Per session: After activating, S! Appli asks, for the
first use, whether to allow the use of the function.
Display this message only once.
Per access: Every time you use a function, display a
message for confirmation.
Never: Never allow the use of the function.
• To restore defaults
In Step 3, select Reset →Yes
Default
Setting
■Normal settings
24-14
S! Appli
24
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings →Backlight
BSelect the setting and press c
Application Volume
Adjust the volume of sounds.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings →Application
Volume
BUse a to adjust the volume and
press c
Vibration
Set whether or not to active the vibration when using
S! Appli with vibrator.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings → Vibration
BSelect an item and press c
Tip
• The contents of Backlight are:
Always On: Set the backlight always on.
Always Off: Set the backlight always off.
Normal settings: Settings of Backlight time ( P.8-8)
for Display settings take priority.
Default
Setting
■Level 3
Tip
• Sound volume in Manner Profile
Sound volume follows the settings of the current
Manner Profile.
Default
Setting
■On
24-15
S! Appli
24
S! Appli Sort
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings → S! Appli sort
BSelect an item and press c
Reset S! Appli Settings
Restore S! Appli settings to defaults.
APress c and select S! Appli →
S! Appli settings →Reset S! Appli
settings
BEnter Phone Password, press
c (Confirm) and select Yes
Default
Setting
■By Date
24-16
S! Appli
24
Appendix
25-2
Appendix
25
Functions
Main Menu
Item Item Page
S! Appli S! Application list P.24-2
S! Appli Settings P.24-13
Yahoo! Keitai
Yahoo! Keitai P.21-3
Bookmarks P.22-10
Saved pages P.22-9
Enter URL P.21-4
History P.22-12
Browser settings P.23-2
Media Player Music P.10-3
Video P.10-9
Camera
Take photo P.7-5
Record video P.7-11
Go to photos P.7-6
Go to videos P.7-12
Dynamic effect list P.7-19
Video editor P.7-17
Data Folder
Pictures P.11-2
Videos P.11-2
Sounds &
Ringtones P.11 - 2
S! Appli P.11-2
Book P.11-2
Other documents P.11-2
Memory status P.11-3
Messaging
Received msgs P.17-4, 18-2
Create msg P.17-9
Drafts P.18-8
Unsent msgs P.18-9
Sent msgs P.18-8
Templates P.17-15
Server mail box P.19-2
Settings P.20-2, 20-5
Memory status P.18-2
Main Menu
Item Item Page
25-3
Appendix
25
Tools
Alarms P.14-2
Calendar P.14-5
Voice recorder P.14-16
World clock P.14-19
Calculator P.14-21
Converter P.14-21
Stopwatch P.14-24
Dictionary P.14-24
Photo slide P.8-3
Interpreter P.14-25
Memory status P.14-13
Phonebook Phonebook List P.5-9
Main Menu
Item Item Page
Settings
Phone settings -
Sound settings P.9-4
Display settings P.8-1
Call settings -
Phonebook settings P.5-1
Connectivity P.12-1
Security P.13-1
Software Update P.25-10
Memory settings P.13-11, 15-9
Main Menu
Item Item Page
25-4
Appendix
25
Troubleshooting
■708SC does not turn on
"Is battery empty?
#Replace or charge battery.
"Is battery installed in 708SC?
#Install battery correctly.
■When power is turned on, PIN entry
window appears
"Is PIN lock set to Enable?
#If PIN lock is Enable, enter PIN.
■When power is turned on, USIM
password entry window appears
"Is USIM lock set to Enable?
#If USIM lock is Enable, enter USIM
password.
■Please insert USIM card or This card
cannot be recognized appears when 708SC
is turned on or executing a function
"Is USIM Card correctly installed?
#Check to see if USIM Card is correctly
installed. If the message appears even
though USIM Card is correctly installed,
it may be damaged.
"Is an incorrect USIM Card used?
#Check to see if correct USIM Card is
used. Use USIM Card specified by
SoftBank.
"Are the IC contacts of USIM Card
contaminated with fingerprints, etc.?
#Wipe contamination off with a clean, dry
cloth, and install USIM Card correctly.
25-5
Appendix
25
■Reading USIM Cannot operate or Reading
USIM Card Cannot start appears
#USIM Card data is being read. Try again
later.
■A Busy tone continues after dialing
"Have you entered a phone number
beginning with zero such as an area code?
#Enter a phone number beginning with
zero such as an area code.
"Is 708SC set to Offline mode?
(appears)
#Change 708SC to another mode such as
Normal.
■ or appears and no calls can be
initiated
"708SC is out-of-range.
#Move to a place where the signal is
stronger and try again.
■Calls are interrupted or disconnected
"Does or appear?
#Move to a place where the signal is
stronger and try again.
"Is battery empty?
#Replace or charge battery.
■Unable to initiate a call
"Is Call Barring set?
#Deactivate Call Barring.
25-6
Appendix
25
■Unable to open Phonebook entry, Data
Folder, Call Log, Calendar, or Messaging
"Is Privacy lock set?
#Cancel Privacy lock.
■Clicking noise is heard during a call
"Noise may be generated when the signal
is weak or while moving between
coverage areas.
■Unable to charge battery
"Is AC Charger Connector securely
inserted into 708SC?
#Insert AC Charger Connector securely.
"Is AC Charger securely inserted into an
electric outlet?
#Insert AC Charger securely.
"Is battery installed in 708SC?
#Install battery correctly.
"Are the charging terminals of 708SC,
battery or the connector plug of AC
Charger clean?
#Clean the contacts with a dry cotton swab,
etc.
"Has battery been charged in places with
ambient temperature below 5 ºC or above
40 ºC.
#Charge battery in places with ambient
temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC.
"Battery may need to be replaced.
#Replace with a new battery.
"Does battery always lose its charge
quickly after being charged?
#Battery life has expired. Replace with a
new battery.
25-7
Appendix
25
"Does 708SC or battery become very
warm during charging?
#If the temperature rises too much,
charging may stop. After 708SC and
battery are cool, retry charging.
■Devices become hot
"During charging, AC Charger may
become hot.
"708SC may become hot during charging
or a long call.
#If 708SC can be touched with your hand,
it is normal. If it is too hot to touch,
immediately stop charging and contact
Customer Service ( P.25-25).
■Battery drains quickly
"Battery may drain quickly depending on
the operating environment (Ambient
temperature, charging conditions, or
Signal Strength), operations, and settings.
#Use 708SC in an appropriate environment
and reduce operations requiring high
power ( P.1-14).
■Display flickers
"Is 708SC used near a fluorescent light?
#Use 708SC as far away from a fluorescent
light as possible.
■Display is dim or unlit
"This may be due to the characteristics of
Display and not a problem. The time
(seconds) until Display is dimmed or unlit
25-8
Appendix
25
can be changed by adjusting the
Backlight time.
■Unable to play music through the speaker
"Is Manner Profile set?
#Cancel Manner Profile.
"Is the stereo earphone microphone
connected?
#Disconnect the connector for the stereo
earphone microphone from 708SC.
■Too many applications are already running,
thus unable to launch anymore appears
"Memory is low or full.
#Delete unnecessary S! Mail messages. If
multiple functions are active, close some
of them.
■Unable to establish Bluetooth® or USB
connections using Samsung PC Studio
"Is the USB driver installed? (for USB
connection)
#If communications are executed
connecting to a personal computer with
the supplied USB cable, installing the
driver is required. Install the driver from
the supplied CD-ROM.
"Is the connection method set correctly on
the personal computer?
#Set the connection method to USB or
Bluetooth on the Connection Manager of
Samsung PC Studio or the Connection
Wizard for the communication in use.
25-9
Appendix
25
"Are the settings of Bluetooth® or the USB
connection port of the PC same as those
for Samsung PC Studio?
#Make sure port settings match those set
for Samsung PC Studio Connection
Manager or Connection Wizard.
■Some Phonebook entries do not appear
"Is 708SC set to Hide in Secret Mode?
#Set to Show in Secret Mode.
■Message cannot be created
"Shared Memory may be full.
#Delete unnecessary messages. If available
memory is less than 464 KB, messages
cannot be created.
■Try again appears
"Signal conditions are poor.
#Move for a stronger signal and try again.
■Sending message failed or Unknown error
appears
"Network connection failed.
#Try again later.
■All available connections are busy appears
"New S! Mail arrives while 708SC is
being used for packet data
communications.
#End the data communication and try
again.
■Service unavailable appears
"708SC is outside the service area.
#Send from within the service area.
■No response appears
"Network/Server is busy.
25-10
Appendix
25
#Try again later. ■Change from flight profile to other profile
for network service,created message will be
saved in outbox appears
"Offline mode is active.
#Cancel Offline mode and try again.
■Cannot download because of too large data
appears
"S! Appli memory is full.
#Delete unnecessary S! Appli and try
again.
■Received invalid data. Quit download or
Cannot download because of too large data
appears
#File cannot be downloaded; cancel
download.
25-11
Appendix
25
Software Update
Check for 708SC software updates and download as
required. Choose to begin Update or Schedule
update.
APress c and select Settings →
Software update
BPress w (Yes)
708SC connects to network.
CRead Terms of Use and select Agree
Read through Terms of Use before selecting
Agree.
DEnter Center Access Code ( P.1-26)
and press c
Update Result appears.
EPress c
To update immediately
Select Update now to start the update. When
completed, 708SC turns the power off and on
again; then Notification window appears.
To schedule later update
aSelect Schedule update
bPress c (Yes)
cPress w (Yes)
dSelect schedule date and press c
eSelect schedule time and press c
fConfirm schedule date & time and press c
Notification Window
25-12
Appendix
25
Tip
• Operation procedures
Procedures can be found in the SoftBank Website
(http://www.softbank.jp).
•Connection fees
Connection fees do not apply to updates (including
checking for updates, downloading, and rewriting).
• Scheduled update time comes
Confirmation window appears at scheduled update
time. Press c or wait approximately ten seconds to
start. Update will not start while 708SC is in use. When
the current operation ends, confirmation window
appears. But other functions active, and ten minutes
after scheduled update time, scheduled update is
automatically canceled.
• To cancel Schedule update
aPerform Steps 1 to 5, select Cancel schedule
bPress w (Yes)
Notification Window
25-13
Appendix
25
Symbols & Pictograms
Symbols
Double-byte Symbols
Note
• Charge battery beforehand; a low battery may
cause update to fail.
• When Scheduled update time comes and 708SC is
out-of-range, Software Update does not start.
• Keep 708SC in a place where signal is strong and
stable.
• 708SC Phonebook entries, media files, and other
contents are not affected by software updates, but
always back-up important information (note that
some files cannot be copied). SoftBank is not liable
for damages from lost information, etc.
• During update, calling or receiving messages, etc.
cannot be used.
• Update may take for a while.
• Update failure may disable 708SC. Contact
SoftBank Customer Center, Customer Assistance.
䄟
25-14
Appendix
25
Single-byte Symbols
Symbol Conversions
Symbol
Label Symbol Symbol
Label Symbol
あっと ＠
@
こめ ※
いこーる ＝
=
ころん ：；
えん
￥
さんかく △▲▽▼
おんぷ ♪ しかく □■◇◆
かける × どう ゝ〃々
かっこ ()「」『』【】〈〉
[]‘
’“
”（
）〔
〕
［
］｛
｝〈
〉《
》
ぱーせんと %
%
ほし ☆★
まる ○●◎
から ∼ やじるし →←↑↓
25-15
Appendix
25
Pictograms
• Pictograms with are animated.
25-16
Appendix
25
• Some pictograms and animated pictograms may not appear properly on some models of SoftBank handsets or other
devices.
25-17
Appendix
25
Memory List Specifications
708SC specifications may change without prior
notice.
SoftBank 708SC
• 708SC with battery installed.
Shared Memory
S! Mail
Received msgs Up to 500 messages
Drafts Up to 10 messages
Unsent msgs Up to 10 messages
Sent msgs Up to 250 messages
SMS
Received msgs Up to 500 messages
Drafts Up to 10 messages
Unsent msgs Up to 10 messages
Sent msgs Up to 250 messages
Data Folder
Pictures
Up to 999 items
(files and
subfolders) per
folder
Videos
Sounds &
Ringtones
S! Appli
Book
Other documents
Item Specification
Weight Approximately 97 g
Continuous Talk
Time
Voice Call:
Approximately 165 minutes (3G)
Approximately 310 minutes
(GSM)
Video Call:
Approximately 100 minutes (3G)
Continuous Standby
Time (708SC closed
and sub Display
OFF)
Approximately 255 hours (3G)
Approximately 300 hours (GSM)
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approximately 51.4 x 102.5 x
11.9 ㎜ (708SC closed)
Maximum Output 0.25 W
25-18
Appendix
25
• Battery Time is calculated by SoftBank under
stable signal conditions. Calling in poor signal
conditions or leaving 708SC on out-of-range will
consume more power and may reduce Battery
Time by more than half.
• Frequent 708SC operations requiring Backlight
(e.g., Yahoo! Keitai) may reduce Continuous Talk
Time and Continuous Standby Time.
• Using video for Wallpaper may significantly
reduce Continuous Talking and Continuous
Standby Times.
• Using S! Appli may reduce Continuous Talking
and Continuous Standby Times.
• Continuous Talk Time is an average measured with
a new, fully charged battery in stable signal
conditions. Continuous Standby Time is an
average measured with a new, fully charged battery
with 708SC closed without calls or operations, in
Standby, in stable signal conditions. Alternating
between usage and Standby shortens Continuous
Talk Time and Continuous Standby Time. Talk
Time/Standby Time may vary by environment
(battery status, ambient temperature, etc.).
Battery
AC Charger
Item Specification
Voltage 3.7 V
Type Lithium-ion
Capacity 880 mAh
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approximately 46.3 x 36.9 x 5.2
mm
(without protruding parts)
Item Specification
Power Source AC 100 V-240 V, 50/60 Hz
(with power cable)
Output Voltage/
Current DC 5 V/720 mA
Charging
Temperature 5 to 40 ºC
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approximately 53 x 49 x 20 mm
(without cables)
Cord Length Approximately 180 cm
25-17
Appendix
25
INDEX
A
AC Charger .............................................1-14
Acoustic shock ........................................15-5
Activate Secret mode .........................13-6
Activating Bluetooth® .......................12-4
Activating S! Appli ..............................24-3
Active Folder ...........................................15-6
Add to playlist ........................................10-5
Adding Reject Black List ................13-9
Adjusting earpiece volume ...............2-7
Adjusting ringtone volume ...... 2-3,6-3
Adjusting volume level to play
.......................................................... 10-7,10-12
Alarms .........................................................14-2
All music ....................................................10-3
Anniversary .............................................14-9
Answer Machine .....................................2-5
Answering mode ...................................12-9
Anykey answer ......................................15-5
Applicable Profiles for Bluetooth®
...................................................................... 12-2
Attaching files ...................................... 18-13
Attaching to a message for sending
still images ........................................... 7-20
Attaching to a message for sending
videos ............................................7-20,11-13
Attaching/Inserting a file .............. 17-15
Audio Skin ............................................... 10-7
Auto power ON ..................................... 14-4
Auto redial ............................................... 15-2
B
Backlight ................................ 8-7,10-8,24-13
Battery ...............................................1-10,1-12
Bluetooth® ................................................ 12-2
Bluetooth® Address ........................... 12-3
Bluetooth® service .............................. 12-3
Browser Information ........................ 23-3
C
Cache ........................................................... 21-2
Calculator ............................................... 14-19
Calendar ....................................................14-5
Calendar window format ................14-6
Call answer mode ..................................9-3
Call cost limit ..........................................2-12
Call Log Records ....................................2-9
Call Transfer service .........................16-3
Call Waiting ............................................16-8
Caller ID ..................................................16-13
Camera .........................................................7-2
Camera mode ...........................................7-4
Camera setting .......................................7-13
Capturing continuous images ........ 7-8
Capturing in Mosaic shot ................. 7-9
Capturing mode ......................................7-4
Capturing still images .........................7-5
Capturing videos ..................................7-10
Category ......................................................5-7
Centre access code ...............................1-23
Certificates ................................... 22-16,23-4
Changing a file name .......................11-15
Changing a folder name .... 11-15,18-15
Changing mail address .....................20-2
Changing phone password .............13-2
25-18
Appendix
25
Changing PIN .........................................13-2
Changing PIN2 ......................................13-2
Changing profile .....................................3-3
Changing settings of each profile
........................................................................9-2
Changing to SMS ...............................17-12
Changing to S! mail ..........................17-12
Changing voice recorder settings
....................................................................14-17
Charger Port .............................................1-7
Charging .......................................... 1-14,1-16
Checking memory usage ....... 15-8,18-2
Clear memory .......................................13-10
Clock Display ............................................8-4
Conference Call .....................................16-9
Connecting a Bluetooth®-
compatible device ................... 12-6,12-9
Connection to another Bluetooth
devices .....................................................12-6
Content key info ..................................11-14
Converting currency or unit .......14-19
Cookie setting .........................................23-2
Copy text ..................................................22-13
Copying characters ............................ 4-13
Copying files ......................................... 11-16
Copying folders ................................... 11-16
Copying items ........................................ 5-14
Copying Phonebook ........................... 5-15
Copyrighted file icons ....................... 18-5
Country code .......................................... 15-3
Creating a folder .....................11-15,18-15
Creating a play list ............................. 10-6
Creating messages ............................... 17-6
Current contacts .................................... 2-9
Cutting characters .............................. 4-13
D
Data folder ......................................7-15,11-2
Date and time setting ........................ 1-18
Default name ........................................ 14-17
Default style ............................................ 20-4
Deleting a bookmark ....................... 22-11
Deleting a file ........................................ 11-17
Deleting a folder ......................11-17,18-16
Deleting a Saved page ....................... 22-9
Deleting a S! Appli .............................. 24-5
Deleting access logs ...........................22-11
Deleting Cache .......................................23-4
Deleting Calendar items ................14-13
Deleting Call Log Records .............2-10
Deleting characters .............................4-12
Deleting Cookies ...................................23-4
Deleting messages ................................18-9
Deleting messages in server ...........19-3
Deleting My devices ............................12-5
Deleting Phonebook ............................5-15
Deleting still images ..............................7-6
Deleting templates ..........4-17,18-9,18-11
Dialed Call Log Records ...................2-9
Dialing display .........................................8-8
Dictionary ...............................................14-22
Display ..........................................................1-8
Display brightness .................................8-7
Display mode ..........................................14-7
Display Operator name ......................8-5
Display rendering ..............................22-12
Display size of videos .......................10-12
Displaying Slide show ......................17-12
Download Content Key ..................11-14
25-19
Appendix
25
Downloading a S! Appli ...................24-2
Drafts ...........................................................18-2
DTMF .................................................... 2-8,6-5
Dynamic effect list ...............................7-19
E
Earphone call ..........................................15-3
Editing bookmarks ...........................22-10
Editing Calendar details ................14-12
Editing Phonebook ..............................5-14
Editing still images ..............................7-15
Editing Style ..........................................17-13
Editing the title for a Saved page
......................................................................22-8
Editing Videos ........................................7-17
Effect sound and keypad tone
volume .......................................................9-2
Effect sound setting ...................... 9-3,9-7
Effects ..........................................................7-12
Encode .......................................................22-15
Entering a number to select an item
......................................................................1-21
Entering by quoting text ..................4-11
Entering characters ......................4-2,4-5
Entering emoticons ............................. 4-10
Entering pictograms .......................... 4-10
Entering symbols ................................. 4-10
Entering URL ........................................ 21-3
Entry mode for characters .............. 4-2
Event list .................................................. 14-12
External Device Port ........................... 1-7
F
File details .............................................. 11-14
File Viewer ............................................... 11-5
Font size .............................4-15,8-6,8-9,23-3
Forwarding .............................................. 18-8
Forwarding Messages ....................... 19-4
Forwarding messages in server .. 19-4
Frames .................................................7-6,7-16
G
Greeting Messages ................................ 8-9
H
Holiday .......................................................14-9
Home zone ................................................1-20
I
Icons for attached files ....................17-16
Icons for files ................................. 11-2,11-4
Icons on Drafts list ..............................18-4
Icons on My devices list ...................12-6
Icons on Received messages list
......................................................................18-4
Icons on Sent messages .....................18-5
Icons on Unsent messages list ....... 18-5
Image display ..........................................23-2
In-car charger ........................................1-16
Initiating a call ............................... 2-2,2-14
Initiating a call overseas ..................2-14
Initiating a Video Call ........................6-2
Initiating an international call
.............................................................. 2-2,2-14
Inserting/Removing USIM Card .1-3
Installing and removing battery .1-12
25-20
Appendix
25
International code ................................15-2
International roaming .......................2-13
Interpreter ..............................................14-23
Invoking a function with Switch Bar
......................................................................1-22
Invoking functions from Main menu
......................................................................1-20
Items to save to Phonebook .............5-2
J
Java Script ................................................23-3
Jump .............................................................4-14
K
Key assignments .....................................4-3
Keypad tone ...............................................9-3
L
Language ...................................................8-10
List Font Size ............................................8-6
Locking/unlocking .............................11-14
Locking/unlocking files ..................11-14
Locking/Unlocking sound files .. 14-17
Locking/Unlocking S! Appli ......... 24-4
M
Mail art function .................................. 17-7
Mail Server .............................................. 19-2
Mailbox ...................................................... 18-2
Main menu style ..................................... 8-5
Manner profile ........................................ 3-2
Mark default number ....................... 5-14
Maximum of message size .............. 20-4
Media Player .......................................... 10-2
Memo ......................................................... 14-10
Message ...................................................... 17-2
Message details ...................................... 18-3
Message List ........................................... 19-2
Message type icon ................................ 18-3
Missed Call .........................................2-4,2-9
Mobile Postcard ..................................... 7-7
Mobile tracker ....................................... 13-7
Modifying characters ........................ 4-12
Move to USIM ..................................... 18-20
mPet ............................................................. 24-5
mPostcard ...................................................7-6
Multi Selector ........................................... xiv
Mute ................................................2-3,2-8,9-4
My devices .............................12-4,12-8,12-9
My phone’s name ...............................12-11
My phone’s visibility ........................12-10
My phone’s visibility for Bluetooth®
....................................................................12-10
N
Network mode ........................................2-13
Network password ................... 1-24,16-13
Network Profile .....................................2-13
Network selection .................................2-13
Network S! Appli .................................24-2
O
Offline Profile ...........................................3-2
Opening Saved page ...........................22-8
Operating messages in server ......19-2
Operations available during a Video
Call ..............................................................6-3
Operations during a call ....................2-8
25-21
Appendix
25
Option menu ...........................................1-23
Outgoing/incoming call barring
service ....................................................16-11
Owner information .............................5-16
P
Page Details ............................................22-14
Page Window ..........................................21-4
Password Lock .......................................13-5
Pasting characters ...............................4-13
Phone lock .................................................13-5
Phonebook search ..................................5-9
Photo slide ...................................................8-2
PIN ..................................................................1-5
PIN authentication at power on
.............................................................. 1-5,13-3
PIN lock ......................................................13-3
PIN2 ................................................................1-5
PIN2 lock unlocking code ...............13-3
Player settings ............................ 10-7,10-11
Playing melody ......................................10-3
Playing video ................................. 7-15,10-9
Playing voice .........................................14-16
Popup menu .............................................. 8-6
Power ON/OFF ............................1-17,1-18
Predictive entry function ON/OFF
...................................................................... 4-14
Preferences .............................................. 23-2
Preferred network .............................. 2-14
Pre-installed ............................................ 11-2
Print via Bluetooth® .......................... 12-7
Privacy Lock ........................................... 13-6
Providing Manufacturer Number
...................................................................... 23-3
PUK Code ..........................................1-5,13-3
Putting a call on hold .......................... 2-7
Q
Quoting for entries ............................. 4-11
R
Received call log ..................................... 2-9
Received messages .............................. 18-2
Receiving a call ....................................... 2-3
Receiving a Video Call ....................... 6-2
Receiving all messages ...................... 19-2
Receiving data via Bluetooth® .....12-7
Receiving message in server ..........19-2
Receiving settings .................................20-3
Record settings ....................................14-17
Recording voice ...................................14-16
Registering an S! Mail Template
....................................................................18-19
Registering as S! Mail Template
......................................................................18-6
Registering SMS templates ............4-16
Registering to bookmark ................22-9
Registering to Phonebook .................5-4
Rejecting call reception ....................15-6
Rejecting incoming calls ..................13-8
Renaming a still image file ...............7-6
Renaming My devices .......................12-5
Renaming sound files ......................14-17
Repeat mode ................................ 10-7,10-11
Reply .................................................. 17-5,18-7
Reply with text .......................................20-6
Reset ...........................................................13-11
Reset all ....................................................13-11
Reset settings ........................................13-11
25-22
Appendix
25
Resetting a call cost .............................2-11
Resetting Call times ............................2-11
Resetting PIN lock ...............................13-3
Resetting S! Appli settings ...........24-14
Restarting paused S! Appli ............24-4
Retry function ........................................17-2
Retry with ...................................................6-6
Ringtone for a Voice Call ..................5-8
S
Saving a page ..........................................22-8
Saving as a template .........................17-20
Saving attached files .........................18-14
Saving images .........................................22-2
Saving sounds .........................................22-5
Saving to Drafts ..................................17-20
Schedule .....................................................14-7
Search text ..............................................22-13
Search type ...............................................5-12
Secure mode for data transfer ...12-11
Security .....................................................24-12
Security Codes .......................................1-23
Selecting 3G or GSM .........................2-13
Sending a bookmark URL ........... 22-10
Sending a message from Drafts .. 18-8
Sending data via Bluetooth® ........ 12-6
Sending from Unsent Messages .. 18-9
Sending settings ............... 17-12,20-2,20-5
Sending sound files ........................... 14-16
Sending still images via Bluetooth®
...................................................................... 12-6
Sending URL ........................................ 22-14
Sending videos via Bluetooth®
.............................................................7-12,12-6
Sending your image .............................. 6-5
Sent messages ......................................... 18-2
Server Certification ......................... 22-14
Server Mail Size ................................... 19-2
Shortcut operations ............................ 7-10
Shortcuts ..........................................1-22,15-7
Side Key ..................................................... 15-6
Side Key Lock ........................................ 15-6
Simple Search Setting ....................... 15-7
Skin ............................................................... 10-8
Slide show ................................................. 11-3
SMS .....................................................17-2,20-5
SMS templates .......................................4-11
Softkey .......................................................... xiii
Software Update .................................25-10
Sort .........................................11-9,14-13,18-17
Sorting files ..............................................11-9
Sound file details ................................14-17
Sound file setting ................................14-16
Sound playback .....................................23-2
Sound Settings .........................................9-4
Speaker Phone call ................................2-7
Speed dialing ...........................................5-12
SSL/TLS ....................................................21-2
SSL/TLS certificate ............................23-4
Still image details ...................................7-6
Stopping or Pausing S! Appli .......24-3
Stopwatch ...............................................14-22
Streaming ..................................................22-7
Sub LCD Light ........................................8-8
Substitute images ...................................6-6
SVG-T/Flash® Viewer ......................11-8
Switching callers .................................16-10
S! Appli .......................................................24-2
S! Appli detailed information ......24-4
25-23
Appendix
25
S! Mail .........................................................17-2
S! Mail templates ................................17-14
T
Task ............................................................14-10
Templates ........................................ 4-11,18-2
Timer ...........................................................7-11
U
Unsent messages ...................................18-2
Updating information ......................22-13
Updating mail list .................................19-2
USB connection ...................................12-11
User dictionary ......................................4-15
USIM Card ................................................1-2
USIM lock .................................................13-4
USIM password .....................................13-5
Using a file ..............................................11-10
Using a template .................................17-14
Using SMS templates .........................4-16
V
Various settings for Video Call ..... 6-5
vFile ............................................................ 11-12
Vibration ........................................14-2,24-14
Vibrator/Sound settings .................... 9-2
Video Mode ............................................. 7-10
Video settings ......................................... 7-14
Viewfinder .................................................. 7-3
Viewing a file .......................................... 11-3
Viewing attached files ..................... 18-13
Viewing Call cost ................................. 2-11
Viewing Call Log Records ............... 2-9
Viewing Call times .............................. 2-11
Viewing Saved Calendar Entries
.................................................................... 14-12
Viewing your phone number (My
Phonebook details) ......................... 5-16
Visualization ........................................... 10-8
Voice Mail Service .............................. 16-5
Voice Recorder .................................... 14-15
Volume ...................................... 2-7,9-2,24-13
W
Wake-up Alarm ....................................14-2
Wallpaper ...................................................8-2
Web ...............................................................21-2
Web access from a bookmark ....22-10
Web connection from access logs
....................................................................22-11
World clock ...........................................14-18
Y
Yahoo! Keitai ........................................22-16
Z
Zoom list ......................................................8-7
Numerics
3D Pictogram ..........................................20-5
25-24
Appendix
25
Warranty & After Sales
Service
Warranty
The purchased 708SC comes with a Warranty.
• Check the shop and date of purchase.
• Read through the contents of the Warranty and
keep it in a safe place.
• The warranty period can be found in the Warranty.
SoftBank is not liable for damages to you or a third
party from missed calls, etc. due to handset failure or
malfunction, etc.
Repair Requests
Before submitting 708SC for repair, consult the
"Troubleshooting" section.
for a solution. If a problem persists, contact
Customer Service ( P.25-25) or the nearest
SoftBank shop; be prepared to describe problem in
detail.
• During the warranty period, repairs will be made
under the terms and conditions described in the
warranty.
• After the warranty period, repairs will be upon
request; if said repairs can be made, you will be
charged for them.
Note
• 708SC files and settings may be lost or altered due
to accidents or repairs. Keep a copy of important
files, etc. like Phonebook entries. SoftBank is not
liable for damages resulting from accidental loss or
alteration of 708SC files (Phonebook, Data Folder,
etc.) or settings.
• Disassembling or modifying this product may be a
violation of the Radio Law. Note that SoftBank will
not accept repair requests for disassembled or
modified products.
25-25
Appendix
25
Customer Service
If you have questions about SoftBank handsets or services, please call General Information.
For repairs, please call Customer Assistance.
Call these numbers toll free from landlines.
SoftBank Customer Center SoftBank International Call Center
From a SoftBank handset, dial toll free at
157 for General Information or
113 for Customer Assistance
From outside Japan, dial +81-3-5351-3491
(Please take care to dial correctly; international charges
will apply.)
Subscription Areas Contact
Hokkaido, Aomori, Akita, Iwate, Yamagata, Miyagi, Fukushima,
Niigata, Tokyo, Kanagawa, Chiba, Saitama, Ibaraki, Tochigi,
Gunma, Yamanashi, Nagano, Toyama, Ishikawa, Fukui
General Information 0088-240-157 (Toll-
free)
Customer Assistance 0088-240-113 (Toll-
free)
Aichi, Gifu, Mie, Shizuoka
General Information 0088-241-157 (Toll-
free)
Customer Assistance 0088-241-113 (Toll-
free)
25-26
Osaka, Hyogo, Kyoto, Nara, Shiga, Wakayama
General Information 0088-242-157 (Toll-
free)
Customer Assistance 0088-242-113 (Toll-
free)
Hiroshima, Okayama, Yamaguchi, Tottori, Shimane, Tokushima,
Kagawa, Ehime, Kochi, Fukuoka, Saga, Nagasaki, Oita,
Kumamoto, Miyazaki, Kagoshima, Okinawa
General Information 0088-250-157 (Toll-
free)
Customer Assistance 0088-250-113 (Toll-
free)
Subscription Areas Contact
SoftBank 708SC User
October 2006 Version 1
*For more information, please
visit your nearest SoftBank
SOFTBANK MOBILECorp.
Model name : SoftBank 708SC
Manufacturer :Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd.
To help protect the environment and
recycle valuable resources, mobile
phone, and PHS shops displaying the
above mark accept mobile phones,
batteries, and chargers of all
manufacturers.
*Mobile phones, batteries, and chargers
collected for recycling cannot be
returned.
*To protect your privacy, delete any
personal information (telephone